Home

R&S SGU100A User Manual

1. 51 90 Device specific commands ss 188 Digo Me a es 22 Directory Mass M MON cecinere ret erre eerte 148 Displaying AA crane 64 Double CAGGER e n 196 DOWN dese RE MTM 194 E Eco mode PACUV LING oak eM 91 Electrostatic discharge 13 EMI suppression es 14 zi EI 203 Enable registers REMOTE c n 132 Error KEY 26 Error message Query inmterm pledi sess coco eni rae n tren eee etie 120 Resource dOcked accent ocacion ras 120 Eitor messages caras caca 184 Adjustment data invalid 183 186 Adjustment data missing 182 s 186 Adjustment failed 180 sss 186 Cannot access hardware 200 s 186 Cannot access the EEPROM 202 esee 186 Cannot open file 460 Cannot read file 462 Cannot write file 461 Mes Driver initialization failed 204 sssse 186 Driver invalid EEPROM data 203 186 File cannot find directory 468 187 File contains invalid data 465 187 Filename missing 463 186 Hardware revision out of date 201 186 Invalid filename extension 464 186 No current list 241 eds 186 Nofiles found 469 u 187 SCPI fe Unknown list type specified 242 186 Erro
2. passed on Parameters lt Preset gt string Example STAT PRES resets the status registers STATus QUEStionable CONDition Condition Queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status Parameters Condition string Example STATus QUEStionable CONDition queries the Status Questionable Condition register STATus QUEStionable ENABle Enable Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are enabled for the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Parameters Enable string Example STAT OPER ENAB 1 problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit STATUS Subsystem STATus QUEStionable EVENt Event Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out Parameters Event string Example STAT QUES EVEN queries the Status Questionable Event register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt Ntransition gt Sets the
3. For information on how to fulfill these requirements refer to chapter 2 3 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 21 chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 20 chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 22 9 1 How to Generate I Q Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter o Options R amp S SGS B112V and R amp S SGU B120V B140V are required for the I Q mod ulation To generate an I Q modulated signal with higher frequency In this example the R amp S SGU acts as an extension to the R amp S SGU extending its fre quency range to 40 GHz The figure 9 1 shows an example of the test setup How to Generate l Q Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter A OUT JQ OUT Analog Signal R amp S SGU LIN Q IN g t o o Z R amp S SGMA GUI LAN Switch O Fig 9 1 Example of the test setup O For higher setting measuring speeds use a PCle switch and a PCle connections If a common reference frequency is required use the internal reference signal of the signal generator and provide it to the R amp S SGU and the connected signal analyzer e g the R amp S FSW 1 Connect the test equipment as shown on figure 9 1 a Connect the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGU and the controller to a LAN switch b Connect the I Q OUT of the base band signal source to the l Q
4. The PCle Peripheral Component Interconnect Express single lane interface allows remote control with optimized speed For details see chapter 2 3 3 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express on page 23 USB CONNECTOR The USB universal serial bus interface Type Micro allows you to connect various external devices e g e If the interface is configured as a device interface a remote computer can be con nected for firmware update manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software or for remote control of the instrument e Ifthe interface is configured as a host interface a memory stick for file transmis sion can be connected For details see chapter 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB on page 23 User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 27 R amp S SGU100A Instrument Tour LAN CONNECTOR Em vum The LAN Ethernet interface allows you to connect the R amp S SGU to other devices e g a remote computer for firmware update manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software or for remote control of the instrument The connection to the remote computer can be direct or via a network For details see chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 21 RF OUT RF 50 Do Provides an RF 50 Ohm signal output NOTICE Maximum Input Levels Do not overload the RF output The maximum per missible back feed is specified in the data sheet LO IN LO OUT Connectors that can
5. The driver does not support the installed version of a module 202 Cannot access the EEPROM A error occurs when writing or reading a EEPROM The EEPROM might be defect and has to be replaced 203 Invalid EEPROM data 204 Driver initialization failed Initialization of a driver fails when booting the instrument firmware The driver is not compatible with the hardware or software config uration of the instrument 241 No current list There is no list selected To execute the required opera tion a list has to be selected in the related dialog If no list is available a new list must be cre ated 242 Unknown list type specified The list type selected is not valid for the required operation For instance the file extension for mapping files is map It is not possi ble to enter another file extension when selecting a list Check the selected list type 460 Cannot open file The selected file can not be opened Check the path and file name 461 Cannot write file The file can not be written Check if the file is read only 462 Cannot read file The file can not be read Check if the file contents are compatible with the file type 463 Filename missing The required operation cannot be executed because the file name is not specified A file name has to be entered when creating a new list 464 Invalid filename
6. 85 New password 89 Old password essen 85 Security Password 86 87 USB deviCO eire meae aan 85 User name Sequential commands Service request SRQ Service request enable register SRE ROMO eode NS erea setting COMMANAS nr eene terrere Shutting GOWN soii nj alte Gene Software Requirements VISA driver Software OptiOns nere eren irei Special characters SCP ty 193 SRE service request enable register 204 SRQ service request 204 206 Standby ss Key rires Startup complete State VQ modulation ott tete 57 72 Impairments u een 73 Pulsemodulatiofi cuota 74 Static IP address LOST connection tt acct 89 Status QUES P 207 Status byte REMO rita 130 133 Status byte STB ura a 204 Status messages AUFIXGG rro ls das 184 Stat s Tegistels iii its 201 ere Dio e 203 r 203 EVENT nn nan verte te seco 203 A entire 202 NTRAanSiON Re li 203 PU al o Cdi 202 PTRANSIION Arne Haie 203 Status reporting system u s2nsonnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 200 Application tesa 206 Common commands hun una 130 SUB een in deteste eher Storing Subriet MASK ii Ut ost Mile 89 SUMXES ERE TUDIN 191 Syntax elements SERl presn 196 System directory
7. KREKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK kk ck ck kk HE EH ck ck EEK EEK EH HE EX kc k RARA SOURCe IQ STATe ON SOURce IQ IMPairment STATe ON SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage 1I 1 SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q 1 SOURce IQ IMPairment IQRatio 1 SOURce IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe 2 SOURCe IQ CREStfactor 0 05 KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KK Enable output of the generated signal at the RF connector LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 ko ko ko OUTPut STATe ON OUTPut STATe PON UNCH KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK Query LO frequency and power values and set LO KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK LOSCillator FREQuency LOSCillator POWer Set frequency and power on the local oscillator as required KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK EH EEE ko ck ck KE ck ck EX kc kk ck kk KARA KARA ko Switch on the signal f CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk SETTings APPLy KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Unlock the instrument KEK K KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK
8. User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 17 Putting into Operation 2 1 6 2 1 7 Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord the instrument loses its current settings Always press the POWER ON STANDBY key first to shut down the application prop erly 1 Press the POWER ON STAND BY key to save the current setup shut down the operating system and set the instrument to standby state The POWER ON STAND BY LED must be orange Tip If the instrument is operated manually via the R amp S SGMA GUI select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Standby 2 To turn the power off press the main power switch to position O Off None of the front panel LEDs should be on Function Check The instrument automatically monitors the main functions when it is switched on and monitors them continuously during operation A detected fault is indicated by an Error message displayed in the info line of the R amp S SGMA GUI together with a brief error description For an in depth identification of the error press the SGMA GUI gt Info button In response a description of the error s is displayed For more information refer to the Error Messages section in the User Manual Default Settings When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrument state that was set before the instrument was switch
9. eene terree trie neni ianua nnns 74 Pulse Modulation Settings 74 Pulse Connector Trigger Settings 75 External Local Oscillator Settings 75 Trigger Connector Settings eere rre ennt ennnen in asar aii 77 gl e 77 General Instrument Settings and Instrument Setup 79 Hardware Configuration terre ini 79 Software Options eite trente ennemie ad a ERN RE EFE EN ERNA 80 Install SW Optioris net Re ias 82 Protection oir pet aia 83 Security Seti 83 Maintenance rouen men iia 86 Network Settings L Y 87 Remote Channels etre DI ahnen nibii iei 90 Factory Presets beenden iiis 90 Eco Mode cito oi DO 91 Standby and Resta ici ii 92 Di gnostic and Testi ea 92 Keyboard Test iii in an e 92 R amp S SGU100A Contents 9 Performing Configuration Tasks 94 9 1 How to Generate I Q Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter 94 9 2 How to Restore the LAN Connection to an Instrument 96 9 3 How to Switch Between the Operating States 97 9 4 How to Use Computer Names issneeeeeneeeesnnenennennes 99 9 5 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instrument 100 9 6 How to Activate Options eei arcaica cir ic 101 9 7 How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S
10. Conexi n a masa Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso punto de peligro general O Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso D Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico en Corriente continua DC d Advertencia superficie caliente IQ Corriente alterna AC Q Conexi n a conductor de protecci n AS Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 08 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Simbolo Significado Simbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de sefial con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros PELIGRO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n
11. Remote dialog Example USB 0x0AAD 0x00ce 100021 INSTR OxOAAD is the vendor ID for Rohde amp Schwarz 0x00ce is the product ID for the R amp S SGU 100021 is the serial number of the particular instrument 10 1 4 PCI Express Interface A PCI Express PCle connector is provided on the rear panel of the instrument Refer to chapter 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle on page 113 for a description of how to set up a remote control connection via PCle and the permitted cables Via PCI Express some commands can be sent to the instrument with optimized speed memory mapped remote control e g frequency or level settings This allows mini mum setup time PCle Resource String The syntax of the used PCle resource string is PCIe vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial number gt INSTR where e PCle denotes the used interface e vendor ID is the manufacturer ID for Rohde amp Schwarz product ID is the product identification of the R amp S instrument serial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional You can retreive the PCle resource string from the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup Remote dialog Example PCle 0x162f 0x132e 100021 INSTR 0x162f is the vendor ID for Rohde amp Schwarz 0x132e is the product ID for the R amp S SGU 100021 is the serial number of the particular instrument
12. T I a 103 TRIG connector lene TE Na 75 77 Trigger CONNE COM Em 28 Event remote cene i tieng nr pat 133 Trigger connector mode 4 eterne 75 77 U rc 194 A eek nun 194 Update package l 101 Updating R amp S SGMA GUI nennen 20 USB Gorinectihg 2220 eei ce a nl 23 Connector Interfaces USB deviCe uncut USB install See Service Manual sese 101 User name V VISA HiSLIP string LAN string E PCIE string nee Resource SING erat 107 serialstiNg 2522552 ed nn a ent 90 USB Sivad 90 VXI protocol 109 O 103 W Wait Remote E 133 WANN Le ER ctos atna SN 184 White SPACE mn dame annees 196 Z Zeroconf APIA Protocol iu na 22
13. b Press the POWER ON STAND BY key to switch on the instrument c Wait until the POWER ON STAND BY LED is green and not blinking d Press the ID key on the front panel of the instrument 2 Start the SGMA GUI on a computer connected to the same network 3 Open the Instruments dialog and click Scan Note This step is performed automatically on the first start and can also be omit ted for instruments with a direct LAN connection to the computer All instruments will be added automatically to the main panel of the SIGMA GUI 2 3 3 2 3 4 Connecting an External PC and Devices Connecting a Controller via PCI Express A PCI Express connector is provided on the rear panel of the instrument see chap ter 3 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 27 Risk of device failure The R amp S SGU is equipped with a single lane PCle interface that supports hot plugging Do not connect an external PC to the PCle connector of the instrument during opera tion if this external PC does not support hot plugging Using the PCIe interface for remote control of the instrument requires extended knowl edge Refer to chapter 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle on page 113 for detailed information Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB The USB interface on the rear panel of the R amp S SGU allows you to connect either an USB device or use the R amp S SGU as a device and connect it to a controller Connecting a controller host PC o
14. matically shown in this dialog press Scan gt Start to find the instrument 8 Select the R amp S SGU from the list and set Available Instruments gt Select gt On to enable it as an extension A green status indicator Connected indicates the successfully established remote connection between the R amp S SGS ant the R amp S SGU The R amp S SGMA GUI indicates the extended frequency range of the R amp S SGS and the activated extension mode 9 Select Test Signal Connections Test to trigger a check of all required signal connections R amp S SGU as an Extension to the R amp S SGS The diagram displays the connection state of the tested connections 10 Select SGMA GUI gt R amp S SGS gt Freq 40 GHz Lev 30 dBm 11 Select SGMA GUI gt SGS gt RF gt State gt On to enable the output of the CW sig nal The extension adopts these values and states automatically and generates a CW signal with RF 40 GHZ and Level 20 dBm The signal is output at the RF OUT connector on the rear panel of the R amp S SGU R amp S SGU as a Standalone Upconverter Identifying a specific instrument If several instruments are active in the R amp S SGMA GUI use one of the device identifi cation functions to identify a specific device e Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote gt Remote Channels gt Device Identify The green LAN LED on the front panel of the instrument blinks
15. 10 4 2 Installing the Protocol Driver certet ttt te nra 119 User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 6 R amp S SGU100A Contents 10 4 3 10 5 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 1 5 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 10 1 11 10 2 11 10 3 11 10 4 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 11 18 11 19 11 20 11 21 Enabling Fast Settings tme ea 119 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation 120 Remote Control Commands ss 122 Programming Exampl es ieiunio tain nenne sta sa senta usan a RR annans ness 122 Performing General Tasks for Instrument Setup nenn nennen 123 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal 124 Advanced Task for Optimizing Performance 126 Adjusting Network and Remote Channel Settings 127 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI see 128 AA 130 AAPP o sites rensessenssnonsnnsseseg anneeenns 134 Preset Commanxds neis ses sspanssssassstersssssenaseesesspeses snpatens 135 CALibration Subsystem isis sicieccscctcccecsccscetecesscscciec cc ceceeecsssnncceceasanatte cas seacceeescatseenses 136 CONNector SUDSYStOM AAPP o 141 DIAGnostic SUBSYSTEM siccccccccccctecceccccteececsssceedenssectiveeeccccteecescccctivescccctiveresccnteeease 141 Fast Speed Commiands crits ceceasesetecessteassecessteaanecscsevssedeasesacsccesstenccscsrete
16. 12 ENABle part 3121110 Fig 14 2 The status register model Remote Control Basics Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions CONDition The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflect the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading PTRansition NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part none 0 to 1 1 to O or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 51 the EVENT bit is set PTR bit 20 the EVENT bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 21 the EVENT bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENT bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an e
17. 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 Contents roro 11 Key Features ren 11 Documentation OVE rvieW sssssssssssssiesssnssmssassiensnnnaemensnnnaseeesanssanemenanaaensses 11 Typographical Conventions ss 12 Preparing for Usb iii 13 Putting into Operation 13 EMI SUphresSiOmis ese eei o nn ad eniin eec drin 14 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument 14 ACCOSSONY LISTE ss sean teste 15 Placing or Mounting the Instrument iode eve ee 15 Switching the Instrument On and Off 16 Function Check ee a 18 Default Settings p e o eeu u IE Ere Andenne sienne 18 Linux Operating SYSTEM sise 19 Connecting an External PC and Devices 19 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC 20 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN c coerente an 21 Connecting the Instrument to the Network 21 Assigning the IFP Address ee ie 22 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI uuuessnnneenssssnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnn 22 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express 23 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB 23 Instrument he c 25 Front Panel Tour aras cia 25 Rear Panel TOUV iii ina 27 First steps with the Instrument 30 R amp S SGU as an Extension to the R amp S SGS sess 30 R amp S SGU as a Standalone Upconverter ss 34 System CV GO
18. 5 CALibration HREQuest SOUR FREQ 15e9 To do set the frequency of the LO to SOUR POW 10 0 15GHZ and its level to 10dBm 6 CALibration HREQuest SOUR POW 5 To do set the level of the LO to 5dBm 7 CALibration HREQuest PROG UPDate 20 The progress of the level adjustment is 20 8 CALibration HREQuest SOUR POW 20 To do set the level of the LO to 5dBm 9 CALibration HREQuest PROG UPDate 100 The progress of the level adjustment is 100 10 CALibration HREQuest PROG REMove To do delete the progress bar 11 CALibration HREQuest OUTP STATe 0 To do deactivate the RF output of the LO 12 CALibration HREQuest CAL HREQ STOP End of the calibration process za A Bloyr uedolnimiP i dame MEE 138 CALibration QModulator S TARE 2 niic nun 139 CALibration 1QModulator RESUI iii 139 CALibration lQModulator TEMPeral re sun odit ient eerta aaa 140 CALibration 1QModulator LOCAal START iii 140 CALibration 1QModulator LOCal RESUI is 140 iC ALibrationbE Vel STARE ite aan 140 ze Bru riz rem 140 CALibration EEVel TEMPeratute 2 icone aar aE ann ah rp E aE anna 141 CALibration HREQuest Queries the settings required from the instrument during a calibration or a selftest See Calibration process of the R amp S SGU on page 137 for a step by step description of the calibration process CALibration Subsystem Return v
19. 8 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ext Local Oscillator Read the required frequency and level values for the LO 9 Change the settings of the LO to the required values 10 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ext Local Oscillator gt Confirm External LO Settings to apply the changes The 15 GHz signal is output at the LO OUT connector at the rear panel of the R amp S SGU Identifying a specific instrument If several instruments are active in the R amp S SGMA GUI use one of the device identifi cation functions to identify a specific device Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote gt Remote Channels gt Device Identify The green LAN LED on the front panel of the instrument blinks Press the ID key on the instrument s front panel The Edit Instrument dialog of the respective instrument opens Setups for Instrument Control 5 System Overview The R amp S SGU is an instrument intended either for the modulation of IQ signals or as an upconverter in the frequency range of 10 MHz to 40 GHz Optimized for use in automated test equipment ATE the instrument offers very fast settling times in an exceptionally small formfactor and low power consumption The R amp S SGU can be equipped optionally with a mechanical step attenuator 5 1 Setups for Instrument Control The R amp S SGU is an instrument designed for the automated test equipment ATE needs To maintain the small size the
20. AMOQUIAION 1c iiis ai run b a rca 57 12 Crest TB GEO iin et idet in I os axe errang PO eaa 72 ID KV rar decet xe e Ra Ba ee REOR dra Por RD es 26 Identification liec T 131 WMD ALAN CE dT 73 Impairment omnia las 69 194 Input Pulse polatiby roccia eoe toe e entre wi 74 Input connector 28 Input Output connector i28 Install FW 100 Instal SsW Option a een 82 Inst lled ssembly isis ias 80 Installing HardWare coast ree uci ra daa 20 R amp S SGMA GUI 5820 Requirements i20 Software 20 Uninstalling the old version 20 Update ote tms 20 Instrum ntiMessages sidi 188 Instrument settings Recall eise testor a eren 132 151 SAVE saec 5 133 152 Interface messages Interfaces 188 189 lig Intert pL nannten ui i e i t wann ann Changing IP address mode sis gc IST flag Remote 131 K Key 26 LAN 26 POWER ON i25 POWER ON STANDBY 225 RE ON ideis 2 25 Keywords see MnemoniCS oct citi kon ri ticas 189 L LAN Configuration CONNECTION cias Interface IP address Key ss VXI protocol LAN connection Reset address mode sssssssesse 89 LED ERROR WARNING ins zonis 26 Rope
21. INSTruments NAME Name Selects the alias name of the instruments i e sets the Symbolic Name Parameters Name lt SymbolicNamelnstr 1 gt lt SymbolicNamelnstr 2 gt Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 48 INSTruments REMote CHANnel Channel Sets the hardware interface used by the remote channel Parameters Channel List of CHAR Data lt Channellnstr 1 gt lt Channellnstr 2 gt The available interfaces are LAN USB SOCKET PCIe Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Hardware Channel on page 51 INSTruments REMote NAME lt Name gt Enters the IP Address or the host name of the connected instrument Parameters lt Name gt lt Hostname IP AddressInsr 1 gt lt Hostname IP Addres sInsr 2 gt Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Instrument Name IP Address on page 51 INSTruments SCAN State Triggers a scan function and searches for instruments connected to the remote com puter via all of the available interfaces R amp S SGMA GUI Settings Parameters lt State gt number 1 triggers the scan function 0 aborts the running scan proc ess The query command returns
22. IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q lt Q gt Sets the carrier leakage amplitude for the I Q signal component Parameters Q float Range 5 to 5 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit PCT Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Options R amp S SGU B120V B140V Manual operation See Offset on page 73 SOURceJ IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe Angle Sets the quadrature offset for the digital Q signal Parameters Angle float Range 8 to 8 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Options R amp S SGU B120V B140V Manual operation See Quadrature Offset on page 74 SOURce IQ IMPairment STATe State Activates deactivates the impairment or correction values LEAKage QUADrature and IQRatio for the baseband signal prior to input to the I Q modulator Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Options R amp S SGU B120V B140V Manual operation See State on page 73 11 14 SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem SOURce IQ CREStfactor Crest Sets the crest factor of the I Q modulation signal Parameters Crest float Range 0 to 35 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Manual op
23. Parameters lt Polarity gt NORMal INVerted NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse pause INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse RST NORMal Example PULM POL INV selects inverted polarity Manual operation See Polarity on page 74 11 17 STATus Subsystem This system contains the commands for the status reporting system See also chap ter 14 1 5 Status Reporting System on page 200 for detailed information RST on page 132 has no effect on the status registers Value ranges Queries return the current value of the respective register which permits a check of the device status Return values A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 2219 1 The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the R amp S SGU cause the status registers to be changed Setting values A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 7215 1 STATus OPERation CONDIU On 2 isn aaa aan 165 STATus OPERaltion ENABle sui cete ekensi nn a aada ainai aa i a TTE 165 STATUS O PERO EVEN our a a 165 STATus OPERAUbDNTERAISID coc iia 165 STATUS OPER tl n PTRAansition u unn en ea anal han 166 STATUS PRESO una ann anna 166 STATUS QUEStona dle C ONDJIND 2 4 17 22 a ici 166 I STATus OUEStionable ENABle 2 rotten cree notte AR 166 STATus QUESIenable EVENI uenia ee an 167 STATUS QUEStIonableNTRANSIHON 2 3 22 tuae tt er
24. Range 120 to 25 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example See chapter 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 126 Manual operation See Level on page 57 SOURce POWer Subsystem SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset Specifies the constant level offset of a downstream attenuator amplifier If a level offset is entered the level entered with SOURce POWer POWer no longer corresponds to the RF output level The following correlation applies POWer RF output level POWer OFFSet Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but rather the query value of POWer Only dB is permitted as the unit here The linear units V W etc are not permitted Parameters lt Offset gt float Range 100 to 100 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Offset on page 67 SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude lt Amplitude gt Sets the upper limit of the RF signal power The value is not affected by an instrument preset and RST function This parameter is influenced only by the factory preset SYST FPR and its factory value is equal to the upper limit Parameters lt Amplitude gt float Range 300 to 30 Increment 0 01 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Limit on page 68 SOURce POWer PEP Queries the RF signal s peak envelope power at the DUT Return values lt PEP gt float Range 120 to 25 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example see chapt
25. SGU100A Network and Remote Control Operation 10 5 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation The R amp S SGMA GUI can be used to monitor the behavior of one or more instruments while they are remote controlled A typical configuration consists of one monitor controller s and instrument s where the monitor is the remote PC on which the R amp S SGMA GUI is installed and the control ler is the remote PC on which the application program runs Simultaneous control of an instrument from a controller and a monitor may lead to colli sions whenever both the controller and the monitor utilize the same remote channel These collisions are indicated by an error message in the Info line e g Query inter rupted or Resource locked Simultaneous monitoring and control over the same remote channel is only possible if the used protocols support viLock viUnlock and the remote program use these functions The table 10 2 shows whether a collision free communication over a particular combi nation of remote channels is possible or not and if there are any restrictions Table 10 2 Cross reference between used remote channels and collision free communication Monitor LAN LAN HiSLIP USB LAN Socket PCle Controller DOSE LAN VXI 11 OK OK OK OK OK LAN HiSLIP OK OK OK OK OK USB OK OK viLock viUnlock OK OK LAN Socket OK OK OK X OK PCle OK OK OK OK X where e OK commu
26. STDalone RESTart Restarts the instrument Usage Event STANdby Switches the instrument to the standby state To return the instrument into the ready state send the SCPI command RESTart Usage Event LOCK Lock Request Id Sends a lock request ID which uniquely identifies the controller of the instrument Parameters Lock Request Id gt Number 0 test query to check whether the instrument is locked Controller ID request lock from the controller with the specified Controller ID 11 4 Preset Commands Return values lt Value gt Number 0 request refused the instrument is already locked to another Lock Request Id gt i e to another controller 1 request granted Example LOCK 12345 Response 1 UNL 12345 Usage Query only Manual operation See Exclusive Access on page 51 UNLock Unlock Id Unlocks an instrument locked to a controller with Controller ID Unlock Id Setting parameters Unlock Id Number Unlock ID which uniquely identifies the controller of the instru ment The value must match the Controller ID Lock Request Id set with the command LOCK Usage Setting only Manual operation See Exclusive Access on page 51 Preset Commands The following preset actions are available Activation of the default state of all internal instrument functions RST on page 132 Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a mea surem
27. SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD iii 175 ySTem COMMurisale SERIal PARII daas auta tte better a 175 SYS Tem COMMUnicate SERIAESBITSs 5 1 1 oratio aia 175 SYolem MMEMST PATFEUSER une 175 SS Temi SUN E lt deasiamasaueduasavedeasmedaamstidaassduetane 176 SYSTemPROTEEI lt CcHh gt ESTATE coin iii ia aaa 176 SYS Tem STARUP COMPLE 2 ana da 176 SYSTem EMODe Mode Enables and selects the eco mode Parameters Mode OFF EM1 RST OFF SYSTem Subsystem Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Tasks for Instrument Setup on page 123 SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries the error event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue The response is a comma separated list of error number and a short description of the error in FIFO order Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values lt All gt string List of Error event_number Error event_description gt Device dependent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example SYST ERR ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL Queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them Only the error numbers are returned and not the entire error text Return values All string 0
28. Select On to enable it as an extension A green status indicator Connected indicates the successfully established remote connection between the R amp S SGS ant the R amp S SGU The R amp S SGMA GUI indicates the extended frequency range of the R amp S SGS and the activated extension mode ae H 2 sc em aero Ga see on E 8 Select Test Signal Connections gt Test to trigger a check of all required signal connections Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU The diagram displays the connection state of the tested signal connections If the test connections are correct shown by an uninterrupted blue line you can start using the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU in extension mode Tip If your connection is marked as faulty a red line is crossing the blue connec tion line check whether the cables are connected properly Check also if the con nection cables are functioning properly SGU Loin SGS Fig 5 6 A faulty connection between an R amp S SGU and an R amp S SGS 5 2 3 Connection with a PCle Switch The R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU can be connected through a PCle switch as shown in figure 5 7 This setup is recommended for achieving the highest setting measuring speeds PCle switch connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU ILLI Lr wer Application Program R amp S SGU LO IN P R amp S SGMA GUI Fig 5 7 Connection of an R amp S SGS
29. Symbolic Name Instrument Type and connection settings Operating Menu and Toolbar Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 for information on how to configure and manage instruments in R amp S SGMA GUI Instrument Nr Automatically assigned number that indicates the instrument s index in the list of Avail able Instruments Symbolic Name Selects the alias name of the instrument Remote command INSTruments NAME on page 180 Instrument Type Selects the instrument s family Remote command INSTruments TYPE on page 181 Active Activates deactivates the display of the instrument s settings in the main panel Note Only instruments in an active state can be controlled from the R amp S SGMA GUI Remote command INSTruments ACTive STATe on page 179 Operating Menu and Toolbar Exclusive Access Checks whether the instrument is locked by another user and if not locks the instru ment When an instrument is locked it is reserved and can be operated manually or remote exclusively from the remote PC on which the R amp S SGMA GUI is running or from which the SCPI command is sent For interfaces using VISA i e for LAN and USB enabling the Exclusive Access trig gers the standard vi Lock request For remote control over PCle or Socket the lock request is performed on a higher application level Note It is recommended to lock the instrument prior to further co
30. The Configure Instruments dialog opens Select the instrument to be deleted and click the Delete button The selected instrument is deleted from the list of Available Instruments Working with R amp S SGMA GUI 6 4 2 7 How to Delete all Instruments 1 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Configure Instruments dialog opens 2 Click the Clear button All instruments are deleted from the list of Available Instruments 6 4 2 8 How to Reserve the Instrument for Control 1 Open the SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Configure Instruments dialog select the instrument in the list of Available Instruments and select Edit 2 Inthe Edit Instrument dialog enable Exclusive Access 3 Alternatively send the SCPI command INSTruments EACCess STATe from the external PC the R amp S SGMA GUI is installed on The instrument is reserved for control from this external PC and cannot be accessed from any other controller A scan function started from another controller will find the instrument but the instrument is indicated as locked The Exclusive Access must be disabled to remote control or monitor the instrument form another external PC see chapter 10 5 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation on page 120 O The two functions Exclusive Access and monitoring are mutually exclusive 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument T
31. The Configure Instruments dialog opens Select the New button The Add Instrument dialog opens to register a new instrument In the Symbolic Name field enter an alias name of your choice e g SGU 100021 In the Instrument Type field select the device family to connect to Select Remote Control gt Hardware Channel and select the hardware interface For LAN or Socket interfaces select Remote Control Instrument Name IP Address and enter the IP Address or the hostname of the connected instrument e g rssgu100a100021 Tip See also chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 For USB or PCle interfaces select Remote Control gt Serial Number and enter the serial number of the connected instrument e g 100021 Set Active gt On to activate the instrument Only active instruments are displayed in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel Click OK to confirm the settings and to close the dialog or press the Apply but ton to confirm the settings 10 Click the Cancel button to discard settings and to close the dialog 6 4 2 3 How to Scan for New Instruments 1 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments 6 4 2 4 6 4 2 5 6 4 2 6 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI The Configure Instruments dialog opens Click the Scan button to trigger the instrument to scan all remote channel interfa ces for connected instruments Tip To limit th
32. The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of command s for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation PSY S TENE MOD 168 SNS TOME eR ALLT EE 169 SYS Tem ERRO CODE ALL ui 169 SYST M ERR CODE NEXT nenian E N beers ea pe Y EE aae 169 SYS Tem ERROR ala rm 170 SYSTEM ERRO NEXT a 2 2 a ee ii ner 170 SYSTEMISERROTZ nun anal edidi eR ORNA 171 SYSTEM VERSIO iicet oia 171 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress nn enne nn nnns aan 171 SYSTem CoMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MO DE 22 pni enixe onec pa dabei vns 171 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress enne nnns 172 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork REST art 172 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATUS 172 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname 172 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork 1IPADdress GATEWAy 173 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork 1IPADdress SUBNet MASK 173 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWorleRESOUFCEG ue ea anna 173 SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESOUFGB 5 2 en nennen 173 SYSTem COMMunicate PCIexpress RESOUrce iii 174 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESOUrCe iii 174 SYS TemCOMMunicate USB RESQUE acrana eisen 174 SYSTem CoMMunicate SERial RESOUrCe ences i eiiia qa tenni n mana RR i qaa Ra A NAR aiaa 174
33. Usage Event Manual operation See Execute Factory Preset on page 91 11 5 CALibration Subsystem The CALibration system contains the commands needed for calibrating the R amp S SGU R amp S SGU cannot be calibrated on its own Therefore a connection with a signal gener ator local oscillator LO is needed If you use a compatible R amp S signal generator then the calibration process will be completed automatically after starting the calibra tion process Otherwise you have to follow the steps described in Calibration process of the R amp S SGU on page 137 We assume that a remote PC is connected to the instruments the remote PC and the instruments are switched on and a connection between them is established The selftest of an R amp S SGU also requires a similiar instrumental setup You can per form the selftest and read its results using the commands TEST ALL STARt and TEST ALL RESULE CALibration Subsystem Calibration process of the R amp S SGU Controller Fig 11 1 Calibration process of the R amp S SGU No physical connections between the instruments are shown in this graphic In order to complete the calibration process you have to complete the following steps 1 Start an adjustment request with the SCPI command CALibration xxx STARt where xxx stands for I10Modulator IQModulator LOCal or LEVel 2 CALibration HREQuest a Query R amp S SGU for the required LO settings with
34. grouped in rows where one row corresponds to one configured instrument The rows have the following structure lt InstrumentType gt SymbolicName IP Address Hostname lt RemoteChannel gt lt SerialNumber gt Operating Menu and Toolbar File Edit Format View Help SGMA GUI Instrument mapping version 1 SGS SGS rsgs100a100002 LAN 100002 SGU SGU rsgs100a100008 LAN 100008 SGT SGT rsgs100a100006 LAN 100006 Fig 6 1 Mapping file example Tip In a remote control application program address the instruments by their symbolic names and retrieve the remain required settings from the mapping file This workflow is especially useful for frequent exchange of instruments Remote command INSTruments MAPPing FILE on page 179 Scan LAN instruments with host name prefix Sets the prefix the searched host names begin with Use this function to limit the amount of the searched instruments and to speed up the scan process For example set this field to RsSGS RsSGU RsSGT if you want to search for all available instruments Tip If you start a scan for an instrument with a set IP adress and it doesn t appear in the list of available instruments it may be due to the prefixes written in this field You can perform another scan while leaving this field empty Remote command INSTruments SCAN HNPRefix on page 181 6 1 2 2 Add Edit Instruments The dialog provides access to the main instrument s settings such as
35. gt Inthe Info dialog click a message to select it In the lower section of the dialog additional information on the highlighted mes sage is displayed How to display all messages gt Inthe Info dialog click the History button A history of all messages that have occurred since the R amp S SGMA GUI software was started is listed in the upper dialog pane The most recent message is dis played first How to delete an error message gt Inthe Info dialog select the highlighted message and click the Delete button Tip This button is available only when the history of the messages is displayed The highlighted message is cleared How to delete all error messages gt Inthe Info dialog click the Delete All button Tip This button is available only when the history of the messages is displayed All messages are cleared How to delete all brief messages gt Inthe Info dialog click the Del volatile button Tip This button is available only when the history of the messages is displayed All brief messages are cleared How to call the history 1 In the Info dialog click the History button A list of all messages that have occurred since the instrument switch on is dis played The most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list 2 Click the History button once more A list of current messages is displayed Frequency Settings 7 Upconverter Settings This section summar
36. hierzu zahlen u a Ger te Anlagen sowie s mtliches Zubeh r 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 1 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Symbole und Sicherheitskennzeichnungen Symbol Bedeutung Symbol Bedeutung Achtung allgemeine Gefahrenstelle Produktdokumentation beachten EIN AUS Versorgung Vorsicht beim Umgang mit Ger ten mit hohem Gewicht Stand by Anzeige Gefahr vor elektrischem Schlag Gleichstrom DC Warnung vor heiBer Oberflache Wechselstrom AC Schutzleiteranschluss Gleichstrom Wechselstrom DC AC Erdungsanschluss Ger t entspricht den Sicherheits anforderungen an die Schutzklasse II Ger t durchgehend durch doppelte verst rkte Isolierung gesch tzt Masseanschluss des Gestells oder Geh uses EU Kennzeichnung f r Batterien und Akkumulatoren Das Ger t enth lt eine Batterie bzw einen Akkumulator Diese d rfen nicht ber unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden sondern sollten getrennt gesammelt werden Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7 Achtung beim Umgang mit elektrostatisch gef hrdeten Bauelementen EU Kennzeichnung f r die getrennte Sammlung von Elektro und Elektronikger ten Elektroaltger te d rfen nicht ber unsortierten Siedlungsabfall entsorgt werden sondern m ssen getrennt gesammelt werden Weitere Informationen siehe Seite 7 gt p mumg P Pp Warnung vor Laserstrahl Produkte mit Laser si
37. itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 08 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health p
38. on page 146 Usage Event MMEMory STORe STATe lt savrcl_state_nr gt file name Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file OUTPut Subsystem The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same num ber using the common command SAV Setting parameters savrcl state nr Corresponds to the specific number defined with the SAV command e g SAV 4 file name String parameter to specify the file name with extension savEcltxt Example See Storing and Loading Current Settings on page 146 Usage Event 11 11 OUTPut Subsystem zo ING Nr 153 OUTPUT S TATE erien sain nk lan 153 QUTPUESTATEO PON EUER 154 OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWhAr u anna 154 OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer susssisisissseinersennonneseataennnnesienessesentenaunensaun 154 OU TP tshws PROTecIon LEO cote en que Mantes 154 OUTPut AMODe lt AMode gt Sets the mode of the attenuator Attenuator MODe at the RF output Parameters lt AMode gt AUTO FIXed AUTO The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made in the full range FIXed The level settings are made without switching the attenuator When this operating mode is switched on the attenuator is fixed to its current position and the resulting variation range is defined RST AUTO OUTPut STATe State Activates deac
39. savrc1 is applied automatically The current settings of the software are saved to the selected file 3 To load settings from a file select SGMA GUI main panel gt File gt Open 4 Navigate to the directory the file is stored in and select the setting file The saved settings are loaded to the R amp S SGMA GUI and the main panel of the software displays the saved instrument s configuration 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI This section provides information on how to configure and manage instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI For reference information about all provided settings in the user interface refer to the corresponding sections chapter 6 1 2 1 Configure Instruments on page 47 and chapter 6 1 2 2 Add Edit Instruments on page 49 chapter 6 1 2 3 Software Options Dialog on page 52 6 4 2 1 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI chapter 6 1 2 4 Reset SGMA GUI on page 52 How to Automatically Add New Instruments to the SGMA GUI 1 For each new instrument perform the following steps a Connect the instrument to the network b Switch the instrument on C Press the ID key on the front panel of the instrument Start the SGMA GUI on a computer connected to the same network All instruments will be added automatically to the main panel of the SGMA GUI 6 4 2 2 How to Manually Add New Instruments to the SGMA GUI In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments
40. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 ck kk ko ko OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer ES SS Optimizing the quality characteristics of the RF signal CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck kk kk ck SOURce POWer LMODe LNOise optimize the signal to low noise ratio SOURce POWer SCHaracteristic AUTO ensure highest dynamic range SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 30dBm SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 30dBm OUTPut STATe PON UNCHanged 11 1 4 Programming Examples KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KK KKK Query local oscillator frequency and power values and set LO EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck 2 ck 2 2 ko ko ko kckck ok LOSCillator FREQuency LOSCillator POWer Set frequency and power on the local oscillator as required CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Switch on the signal CKCkCkCck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kc kk SETTings APPLy kkkkkxkkxkxkkxkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
41. CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 par analogie A Appareil de la classe A Appareil appropri un usage dans tous les environnements autres que l environnement r sidentiel et les environnements raccord s directement un r seau d alimentation basse tension qui alimente des b timents r sidentiels Remarque ces appareils peuvent provoquer des perturbations radio lectriques dans l environnement r sidentiel en raison de perturbations conduites ou rayonn es Dans ce cas on peut exiger que l exploitant mette en oeuvre de mesures appropri es pour liminer ces perturbations A Appareil de la classe B Appareil appropri un usage dans l environnement r sidentiel ainsi que dans les environnements raccord s directement un r seau d alimentation basse tension qui alimente des b timents r sidentiels R paration et service apr s vente 1 Le produit ne doit tre ouvert que par un personnel qualifi et autoris Avant de travailler sur le produit ou de l ouvrir il faut le couper de la tension d alimentation sinon il y a risque de choc lectrique Les travaux d ajustement le remplacement des pi ces la maintenance et la r paration ne doivent tre effectu s que par des lectroniciens qualifi s et autoris s par Rohde amp Schwarz En cas de remplacement de pi ces concernant la s curit notamment interrupteur d alimentation transformateur d alimentation r seau ou fusibles celles ci ne doivent tre rempl
42. Control Basics o Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ON refers to window 2 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parame ters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to chapter 14 1 3 3 SCPI Parameters on page 193 Example Definition HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Command HCOP DEV CMAP COL RGB 3 32 44 Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same line they are separated b
43. IN of the R amp S SGU c Connect the I Q OUT of the R amp S SGS to the and Q connectors of the R amp S SGS d Connect the RF OUT of the the R amp S SGS to the LO IN of the R amp S SGU e Connect the TRIG connectors of the the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU f Connect the RF OUT of the R amp S SGU to the RF IN of the signal analyzer 2 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt R amp S SGS gt Extension Tip Steps 3 to 5 can be omitted if the R amp S SGS and a single R amp S SGU are con nected using PCle or USB or by a direct LAN connection because the SGS will automatically activate the SGU 3 Press the ID key on the front panel of the R amp S SGU only required if the compo nents are connected via a company network 4 Inthe Extension dialog trigger Scan How to Restore the LAN Connection to an Instrument Ths scan functions finds out the connected R amp S SGU 5 Select the R amp S SGU from the list and set Available Instruments gt Select gt On to enable it as an extension A green status indicator Connected indicates the successfully established remote connection to the extension 6 Select Test Signal Connections gt Test to trigger a check of all required signal connections Loin Trig SGS The diagram displays the connection state of the tested connections 7 Select SGMA GUI gt R amp S SGS gt Freq 20 GHz Lev 30 dBm and enable RF gt State gt On The extension adopts
44. INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n e Remote control program using instrument driver VISA available Protocol Proprietary Fe VXI 11 HiSLIP USBTMC Library pae VISA controller Instrument Driver Application Program Fig 10 3 Remote control program using instrument driver VISA available Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Protocol Remote Control Program Socket rssgu init TCPIP rssgu100a100010 5025 SOCKET rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 VXI 11 rssgu init TCPIP rssgul00al00010 inst0 INSTR rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 HiSLIP rssgu init TCPIP rssgul00al00010 hislip0 INSTR rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 USBTMC rssgu init USB 0x0aad 0x00ce 1000010 INSTR rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 PCle rssgu init PCIe 0x162f 0x132e 1000010 INSTR rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 e Remote control program using instrument driver VISA not available Protocol Proprietary Socket e pcie socket Instrument Driver Application Program Fig 10 4 Remote control program using instrument driver VISA not available Protocol Remote Control Program Socket rssgu init TCPIP rssgu100a100010 5025 SOCKET rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 PCle rssgu init PCIe 0x162f 0x132e 1000010 INSTR rssgu SetFrequency 2e9 10 1 2 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is e
45. L installation et le raccordement ne peuvent tre effectu s que par un lectricien ou lectronicien qualifi Sur les appareils stationnaires sans fusible ni disjoncteur automatique ou dispositif de protection similaire int gr s le circuit d alimentation doit tre s curis de sorte que toutes les personnes ayant acc s au produit et le produit lui m me soient suffisamment prot g s contre tout dommage Chaque produit doit tre prot g de mani re appropri e contre les ventuelles surtensions par exemple dues un coup de foudre Sinon les utilisateurs sont expos s des risques de choc lectrique Ne jamais introduire d objets non pr vus cet effet dans les ouvertures du boitier tant donn que cela peut entra ner des courts circuits dans le produit et ou des chocs lectriques incendies ou blessures Sauf sp cification contraire les produits ne sont pas prot g s contre l infiltration de liquides voir aussi la section tats et positions de fonctionnement point 1 Il faut donc prot ger les produits contre l infiltration de liquides La non observation de cette consigne entraine le risque de choc lectrique pour l utilisateur ou d endommagement du produit ce qui peut galement mettre les personnes en danger Ne pas utiliser le produit dans des conditions pouvant occasionner ou ayant d j occasionn le cas ch ant des condensations dans ou sur le produit par exemple lorsqu
46. Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values lt Next gt string Error event_number Error event_description gt Device depend ent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example SYST ERR queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem SERRor Returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started This list corre sponds to the display on the info page under manual control Return values lt Serror gt string Example SYST SERR queries all errors existing in the error queue Example Response 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range The two returned errors have occurred since the error queue was last queried Usage Query only SYSTem VERSion Queries the SCPI version the instrument s command set complies with Return values Version string Example SYST VERS queries the SCPI version Response 1996 The instrument complies with the SCPI version from 1996 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress lt IpAddress gt Sets the IP address Parameters lt IpAddress gt string Range 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 7 8 9 10 sets the IP address of the instrument
47. The instruments configured in the R amp S SGMA GUI are not shut down Shut down instruments and exit Quits the R amp S SGMA GUI and switches the connected instruments to the standby state see alsochapter 9 3 How to Switch Between the Operating States on page 97 Operating Menu and Toolbar 6 1 2 Setup Menu The setup menu provides access to dialogs for setting the general settings of the soft ware like dialogs for managing the connected instruments or dialogs providing infor mation about the installed options 6 1 2 1 Configure Instruments This dialog is the central point for managing the instrument that will be configured and operated via the R amp S SGMA GUI New instruments can be created and appended to the list of available instruments connection settings can be edited instruments can be removed from the list or they can be deactivated but kept in the list for further use ee S 5 Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 for information on how to configure and manage instruments in R amp S SGMA GUI Operating Menu and Toolbar Available Instruments This section comprises a list of configured instruments Each instrument is represented by a Symbolic Name which is also displayed in the main panel and an Instrument Type It is also displayed whether the instrument is activated in the R amp S SGMA GUI and hence displayed in the main panel or not R
48. UNIT POWer Power Defines the default unit for power parameters This setting affects the GUI as well as all remote control commands that determine power values Parameters Power V DBUV DBM RST DBM Example UNIT POW V sets V as a default unit for all commands which determine power values 11 21 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings This section comprises the SCPI commands provided to remote control the R amp S SGMA GUI INSTruments ACTIVE STATE iiio eee treu e ea de RR eat 179 INS Tm COUNT oia ea aa it id de nalen 179 INS Tr mentsseACOessI STAT atur cerea en 179 iNSTr ments MAPPing FIEE 2 itor a at 179 TINS TUMORS NAME 12 222 antec rper Une pore tee e pau an da de e paper asa 180 ANS Truments REMote CHANNEL itio teet de At Ai 180 INS TrIamments REMOS NAME ici adoret oot ente reda eere saei ecd 180 INS Trumens SCAN anenamnn 180 INS Truments SCANIBRIEBTIK 52222 see aaa aaea a fous eo t bene aseo aeu eco etant 181 ANS Tr ments SERIal acceda eet ia Rue 181 INS TrurmentsT YPPE iir ciere eden roy Rena aka 181 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings INSTruments ACTive STATe lt State gt Enables disables the instrument for the R amp S SGMA GUI The main panel of this soft ware displays only activated instruments Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation List of BOOL values lt Statelnstr 1 gt lt Statelnstr 2 gt 0 1 ON OFF See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in
49. and Packing comicocnrriiciriiciiic NEENA rear inii crea R una penas 183 Error Messages and Troubleshooting es 184 Status Information eiii rene erii cinta u ran ein un nara a un ARA Dira RR RR AR rani 184 eE E 184 Volatile INCSSAGCS e 184 Permanent MeESSages iiseeenetiureelinnnress 185 SCPI Error Messages ess sesasesssssansenessesessnessssnsesesssnsanee 185 Device Specific Error Messages 185 A A lt P SERERERENERSERBERIIEERFEURURUNUEN 188 Remote Control Basics tn dd nues land 188 Messages samedis aies dan eee 188 LAN Interface Messages 189 SCPI Command Structures cc rne tte eo nete RE tienen cre ane cue x 189 Syntax for Common Commandqs sse nennen nennen nnns 190 Syntax for Device Specific Commands 190 SCPI Parametar ondean enn Hectore Paso eee ep vipera n pesti ele een ane ee TU REA 193 Overview of Syntax Elemients einer eran terrea axe Pru rt tiennent 196 Structure of a command line 196 Responses to Queries iii 197 Command Sequence and Synchronization nen 198 Preventing Overlapping Execution 198 Status Reporting System 200 Hierarchy of the Status Registers 200 Structure of a SCPI Status Register narnia 202 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enab
50. and an R amp S SGU through a PCle switch R amp S SGS RF OUT LITE E Switch gt e oo gt 1 Connect the PCle switch to a switched off computer with a single lane PCle cable N Connect the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU to the PCle switch 3 Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The POWER ON STANDBY keys of both instruments have to be green and not blinking gt Switch on the computer 5 On the computer start one of the following a the R amp S SGMA GUI b an application program for remote control of the instruments Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 6 Manually or remotely activate the R amp S SGU as an extension to the R amp S SGS The logical connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU is established by the driver layer of a program e g the R amp S SGMA GUI or the library PCleController dll Linux libpciecontroller so of a remote control program on the PC Such a program has to be running on the PC so that an R amp S SGS is able to communicate with an R amp S SGU Operating Menu and Toolbar 6 Understanding the R amp S SGMA GUI Soft ware This section gives a detailed description of the R amp S SGMA GUI user interface and information on how to work with it The main panel with the overview of the configured instruments is the operating and control interface for the whole program From here all program functions are accessible This panel is
51. and one receiving link make up a lane Fast Settings The PCle interface can be utilized not only to transfer text messages e g SCPI com mands but also to carry register based remote control messages The latter mode is called fast settings mode The specially for this purposes provided instrument s driver is mandatory for the instrument control by means of fast settings This instrument driver contains special functions for fast setup e Using the PCle interface is mandatory see also chapter 10 3 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via PCIe on page 113 D To use the advantage of the fast settings the following prerequisites must be fulfilled e The fast settings must be enabled by means of the function rssgu useFastSettings see also chapter 10 3 4 Enabling Fast Settings on page 117 The instrument driver will automatically use the fast settings method whenever possi ble currently only for the parameters frequency level RF state modulator state and will send SCPI messages in all other cases Remote control programs written for PCle will without modifications also run if one of the other control channels LAN or USB is used 10 3 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via PCle To set up a remote control connection vie PCle perform the following steps 1 Configure the controller see 10 3 2 2 Connect the controller and the instrument see 10 3 3 User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 113 10 3 2 Advan
52. and starts the extension mode a N sion is only available for an R amp S SGS with a Controller gt Revision 5 or higher For a description on how to manually set the PCle indentification see chapter 9 7 How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 102 o For a direct PCle connection an automatic identification of the R amp S SGU as an exten You can check the Controller gt Revision of your instrument in the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name Hardware Config dialog Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU If instrument is not automatically added as an extension If the R amp S SGU is not automatically added as an extension you can do that manually in the SGMA GUI gt R amp S SGS Name gt Extension dialog If the R amp S SGU is not listed in the list of Available Instruments you can press Scan gt Start to find the instrument 5 2 2 Connection in a Company Network Connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU in a Company Network As a prerequisite for this example the R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on a remote PC Company Network LAN R amp S SGMA GUI Fig 5 5 Connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU in a company network 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in figure 5 5 a Connect the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGU and the controller to the company net work Setu
53. and their management an Info dialog can be opened 6 2 1 Info Dialog The Info dialog provides a list of currently active permanent messages and a detailed description of each message The messages are color coded according to their level Accessing the Info Dialog gt Inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select the Info button The Info dialog opens SGMA GUI Fey mre File Setup Help a suaz 9 into Info line List of current messages with short message text Detailed description of a highlighted message The upper part of the Info dialog lists the currently active permanent messages See the following table for explanation of the displayed information Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar Parameter Description LEV Message level Messages referring to a logical component of R amp S SGMA GUI e g Unicode are marked in red color info messages are marked in black color The following levels might occur e Err Error message e Info Information message e Sys System message Crit Critical message For detailed information on the message types see chapter 6 2 2 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar on page 54 SCPI Indicates the SCPI error code Text A list of all currently permanent messages in the order of their occurrence i e the most recent message is displayed first The buttons in the lower part of the Info dialog prov
54. be relative or absolute If no file destination is specified the source file is copied to the current directory queried with the MMEMory CDIRectory command Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed MMEMory DATA Filename lt BinaryBlock gt MMEMory DATA Filename The setting command writes the block data lt BinaryBlock gt to the file identified by Filename Set the GPIB bus terminator to EOI to ensure correct data transfer The query command transfers the specified file from the instrument to the GPIB bus and then on to the controller It is important to ensure that the intermediate memory on the controller is large enough to take the file The setting for the GPIB bus terminator is irrelevant Tip Use this command to read transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms directly from to the instrument Parameters lt BinaryBlock gt lt number gt lt length_entry gt lt data gt Hash sign always comes first in the binary block number the first digit indicates how many digits the subse quent length entry has lt length_entry gt indicates the number of subsequent bytes data binary block data for the specified length For files with a size with more than 9 digits Gigabytes the instrument allows the syntax Length
55. be used for local oscillator signals and alternatively also in MIMO setups Local oscillator input and output LOIN Input for external LO signals e LO OUT Output of internal LO signals TRIG O Multi purpose connector The TRIG connector is used mainly as an input connector for an external pulse modulator source l IN OUT User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 28 Rear Panel Tour The I IN and Q IN connectors are the inputs of the I Q modulator provided for feeding of external signal The OUT and Q OUT connectors are for direct output of the analog I Q signal NOTICE Maximum Input Levels Do not overload the and Q inputs The maximum permissible voltage is 1V For details refer to the data sheet Note The I Q modulator requires the hardware optionR amp S SGU B120V B140V AC SUPPLY AND POWER SWITCH The AC supply and power switch allow you to connect the R amp S SGU to the power sup ply and switch on the instrument For details see To connect the AC supply on page 17 4 4 1 R amp S SGU as an Extension to the R amp S SGS First steps with the Instrument If an R amp S SGU is connected to a signal generator the instrument acts as an extension to the signal generator extending its frequency range This section provides an example on how to configure the instrument to convert a con tinuous wave CW signal R amp S SGU as an Extension to the R amp S SGS In case the R amp S SGU is connecte
56. bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Parameters lt Ntransition gt string Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Ques tionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENT part STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt PTransition gt Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Parameters lt PTransition gt string Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Sta tus Questionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATus QUEue NEXT Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is identical to SySTem ERRor NEXT on page 170 Return values Next string SYSTem Subsystem Example STATus QUEue queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only 11 18 SYSTem Subsystem
57. configuration and obtain all address information automatically Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways e If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automati cally e Ifthe network does not support DHCP the instrument tries to obtain the IP address via Zeroconf APIPA protocol If this attempt does not succeed or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually The R amp S SGU uses the Zeroconf IP addresses 169 254 xxx yyy where xxx may take values between 1 254 and yyy the values in the value range 1 255 the subnet mask is always 255 255 0 0 The IP address of the host must be within the same address area for Zeroconf By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI For information on how to install the R amp S SGMA GUI software refer to chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 20 1 For each new instrument perform the following steps a Connect the instrument to the network
58. de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o n quel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o dafios al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 42 08 Page 14 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Lesen und beachten Sie unbedingt die nachfolgenden Anweisungen und Sicherheitshinweise Alle Werke und Standorte der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe sind st n
59. de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones A Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparaci n y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes origin
60. de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que se considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles dafios materiales En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de sefial aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de sefial en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con pos
61. der zugeh rigen Produktdokumentation und nur in Verbindung mit dem zugeh rigen Produkt verwendet werden Die Verwendung von Signalworten in Zusammenhang mit nicht zugeh rigen Produkten oder nicht zugeh rigen Dokumentationen kann zu Fehlinterpretationen f hren und damit zu Personen oder Sachsch den f hren Betriebszust nde und Betriebslagen Das Produkt darf nur in den vom Hersteller angegebenen Betriebszust nden und Betriebslagen ohne Behinderung der Bel ftung betrieben werden Werden die Herstellerangaben nicht eingehalten kann dies elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen Bei allen Arbeiten sind die rtlichen bzw landesspezifischen Sicherheits und Unfallverh tungsvorschriften zu beachten 1 Sofern nicht anders vereinbart gilt f r R amp S Produkte folgendes als vorgeschriebene Betriebslage grunds tzlich Gehauseboden unten IP Schutzart 2X Verschmutzungsgrad 2 berspannungskategorie 2 nur in Innenr umen verwenden Betrieb bis 2000 m NN Transport bis 4500 m NN f r die Nennspannung gilt eine Toleranz von 10 f r die Nennfrequenz eine Toleranz von 5 D Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf Oberflachen Fahrzeuge Ablagen oder Tische die aus Gewichts oder Stabilit tsgr nden nicht daf r geeignet sind Folgen Sie bei Aufbau und Befestigung des Produkts an Gegenstanden oder Strukturen z B Wande und Regale immer den Installations hinw
62. e Press the ID key on the instrument s front panel The Edit Instrument dialog of the respective instrument opens 4 2 R amp S SGU as a Standalone Upconverter This section provides an example on how to configure the instrument to convert a con tinuous wave CW signal The signal in this example is provided by an incompatible signal generator local oscillator In the following example the instrument is manually operated via the R amp S SGMA GUI software The R amp S SGU in this example is a base unit equipped with the frequency option R amp S SGU B120 Configuring the R amp S SGU to convert a CW signal As a prerequisite for this example the R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on a remote PC and the local oscillator has to be prepared for use Local Oscillator REQUT R amp S SGU LO IN EN euBbis LAN RE OUT Controller Ras SGMA GUI L Control RE IN di euBis o Fig 4 2 Example of a setup of the R amp S SGU as an upconverter 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in figure 4 2 Additional connections may be needed to fulfill the requirements of the connected local oscillator To find out what connections are needed refer to its user manual 2 Switch on the R amp S SGU R amp S SGU as a Standalone Upconverter The POWER ON STANDBY key has to be green and not blinking 3 Press the ID key on the front panel the R amp S SGU only required if the components are connected vi
63. e Red indicates that an error has occurred e g temperature exceeded or power fail ure e Blinking orange indicates a running process e g calibration self test e No light indicates that no errors or warnings have occurred For details on errors or warnings refer to the graphical user interface on a remote PC SGMA GUI gt Info For more information refer to the Error Messages section in the User Manual LAN LAN Pressing the key for more than 3 s resets the LAN interface settings i e the IP Adress Mode is reset to DHCP ID Pressing the ID key while the instrument is active opens the SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Configure Instruments gt Edit Instrument dialog of the corresponding instrument on the remote controller Pressing the ID key of an inactive instrument and starting SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Scan leads to an automatic activation of the instrument in the SGMA GUI R amp S SGU100A Instrument Tour 3 2 Rear Panel Tour This section provides an overview of the connectors on the rear panel of the instru ment For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet IE HH it ui 7 B TN ooo 0 Fig 3 2 Rear panel view Protection of mechanical components To avoid damage of the SMA connectors it is essential to limit the tightening torque to 60 Ncm Use an adequate 8 mm torque wrench and not an ordinary open end wrench PCI EXPRESS CONNECTOR
64. el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales as como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o dafios por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes se ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros Conexi n a tierra El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado
65. exten sion The file extension is not valid for the required operation Check the file extension For instance the file extension for the mapping files is map It is not possible to enter another file extension when storing a list Device Specific Error Messages Error Error Description Remedy Code 465 File contains invalid The selected file contains data thatis Check the file extension data not valid for the file type The file extension determines the data that is valid for this file type If the file extension is changed the lists are no longer recognized and the data are therefore inva lid 468 Cannot find directory Required folder cannot be found Check drive and path 469 No files found Folder is empty Remote Control Basics 14 Annex 14 1 14 1 1 Remote Control Basics This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control Messages The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories e Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They are used to communicate between the con troller and the instrument Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality For details see the sections for the required interface e Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the
66. filename extension 186 465 File contains invalid data 187 468 Cannot find directory ax 107 469 No files found cs rn 187 A AG SUpDDply erret eee er de eres 16 29 Accept Security SettirigjS cie cen ri dei ieee 86 Apply network settings rnit 89 AMECA cio e nt crt tec cett 184 B Boolean parameters ern rte aan 195 C Case sensitivity SO no Change password A m Clear status REMOTE aseene ERS EET 130 O 196 COMMA PES 196 Command sequence recommendation coooooooccccciconococccnnocononononononcnnnnannnnnns 208 Remote 193 Commands 188 Colon 196 Comma sese 196 Command line structure 196 ee io OM 188 Double lag granito Ere 196 Instrument control 188 Overlapping 198 Question mark 196 Quotation mark SCPI confirmed Seg enmtial ere de sde este er ce 198 Syntax elements ss nre tren 196 White Space eer n renean en 196 Common commands EY et 190 Computer name 2 80 Changing 99 CONDITION rre 203 Confirm external LO settings a 16 G nfirm passWord evitara 85 Connector D DE EEE RE 194 Default directory QUST ING errante 148 Default instrument settings eseesssse 18 135 Default values REMOTE de 132 Delete instrument settings css 150 Device identify
67. in the instrument e g switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the 13 2 2 13 4 SCPI Error Messages instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow back ground They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however SCPI command SYSTem ERRor ALL and SYSTem ERRor NEXT Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history SCPI command SYSTem SERRor SCPI Error Messages The SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments Detailed information and an overview of all error messages as defined in SCPI standard can be found in the corresponding documentation The errors are assigned negative numbers The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code Below the er
68. in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer tain order each command must be sent in a separate command line D As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages 14 1 4 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 14 1 Remote Control Basics Synchronization using OPC OPC and WAI Com mand OPC Action Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all previous commands have been exe cuted Programming the controller e Setting bit 0 in the ESE e Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned This is only the case after the Oper ation Complete bit has been set in the ESR This bit indicates that the previous setting has been completed Sending OPC directly after the command whose processing should be terminated before other commands can be executed WAI Stops further command processing until all commands sent before WAI have been exe cuted Sending WAI directly after the command whose processing should be terminated befor
69. instrument is not equipped with a display and hence additional equipment is required to control the instrument This section provides an overview of the possible configuration setups for controlling the R amp S SGU 5 1 1 Manual Operation from the R amp S SGMA GUI The following example represents a basic configuration of the R amp S SGU operated manually by the configuration software R amp S SGMA GUI The configuration software is installed on a remote PC and controls several instruments The instruments are con nected to the remote PC over different remote control interfaces Any combination of the used interfaces is possible USB PCle LAN e g VXI 11 Fig 5 1 Configuration example manual control from R amp S SGMA GUI For information about the manual control refer to O e chapter 6 Understanding the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on page 45 e chapter 7 Upconverter Settings on page 65 e chapter 8 General Instrument Settings and Instrument Setup on page 79 5 1 2 Remote Control from a Controller The remote control provides access to the instrument s settings from a remote com puter external controller by means of remote commands To automate often repeat ing settings and settings sequences these are grouped in the remote control pro grams i e application programs Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU An instrument may be connected to the controller via any of the supported inter
70. is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname on page 172 MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the network adapter Address Mode Selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Network Settings Note Lost LAN Connection to an Instrument If the connection to an instruments configured to use static IP addresses is lost press the LAN LED on the instrument front panel for 3 seconds to reset the Address Mode to its default value Auto DHCP Auto DHCP The IP address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of IP address via DHCP or APIPA Zeroconf in order to use this function Static The IP address is assigned manually Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE on page 171 IP Address Displays the IP address To enter the IP address manually select Static Address Mode In case of manual input of the IP address it is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress on page 171 Subnet Mask Di
71. mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semico lon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path 5 The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it both single and double quotation marks are possible The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 Hexa HF3A7 e Block 21312 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates the header from the parameters 14 1 3 5 Structure of a command line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by one of the following 14 1 3 6 Remote Control Basics e a lt New Line e a lt New Line gt with EOI e an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example MMEM COPY Testi MeasurementXY HCOP ITEM ALL This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the MMEM system the second command belongs to the HCOP system If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the comm
72. necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 Inthe case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains or if the power switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the mains In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnectin
73. previous example stands for 3 5 GHz Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOP y DEV COL Response 1 Text character data is returned in a short form Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND 14 1 4 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands Sequential commands are not implemented in the instru ment however the execution time of most commands is so short that they act as sequential commands when sent in different command lines An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order
74. provided on the CD inclu ded in the delivery In order to build and install this driver root authority is required 1 Copy folder LinuxKernelDriver to your hdd 2 Go to directory host 10 3 2 2 10 3 2 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle 3 On the command line enter make The driver sgshost ko is automatically built 4 Entermake install Device nodes sguX are created under the folder dev X from 0 to 31 The module sguhost is loaded 5 Enter lsmod to verify the module Making Shared Libraries Accessible Two library files per operating system are provided on the CD included in the delivery e for Linux operating system libsocketcontroller so and libpciecontroller so e for Windows operating system SocketController dll and PCIeController dll These libraries act as the dynamic link libraries for programs using the socket or PCIe interface Linux operating system gt To make the libraries accessible perform one of the following a Append the environment variable LD LIBRARY PATH with the path of these two files e g by changing the etc environment file b Move these two files to usr 1ib or 1ib directory Windows operating system gt To make the libraries accessible perform one of the following a Copy these two files to the folder of your executable b Copy these two files to the WINDOWS Nsystem302 folder Building a Program The help file rssgu_vxi chm shows all functions of the instrument which
75. reading the queue the instrument starts with the first occurred error event All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 141 52 Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers States events or summary bits of other registers sme d hy yyy UA Y V AA TTY 15 44 13 12 CONDition part 3 2 1 0 pee eee eee ee 15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0 LELIIILSIITIJIAIELEI y Y Y Y 15 14 13 12 EVENt part s xo og POSE al its Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit of the STB or into the CONDition bit of a superordinate register Logical AND of EVENt and ENABle bits
76. same way for all interfaces if not indica ted otherwise in the description Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in chapter 14 1 3 SCPI Command Structure on page 189 A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter Remote Control Commands There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent Commands Instrument responses Commands Commands program messages are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The commands are subdivided according to two criteria e According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru ment or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header According to their definition in standards Common commands their function and syntax are precisely defined in stand ard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if implemen ted They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency set
77. satin dede ne maman lan as einen ans diese de 180 INSTruments SCAN is JNSTr rments SCAN EINPRefIX cool 2a anne ee Na DLP Literae 181 INSTruments S RIE H enue 181 SINS Truments TYPE E a a AN 181 joo qM es einer SJ 134 MEMO 8 ets E 151 MMEMery CATalog L ENGth3 iter tii a Ne dr e XE RR Tea EE en Re 148 MMEMory CATalog Russe S MMEM rG COPY c M iMMEMOFP DATAS ttr t e Bine em y ve ren etat daniel ere MMEMorny DGATalog bENGIgT a etti retur atr ter eee epe o 150 EMMEMOry DGA Tal0g ri O 150 MMEM6ory DEL te rrt tere tt 150 MMEMory LOAB ST AT Br 151 MMEMGry MDIRStON E HR UPR 151 IMMEMOn MOVE iiiter e tree ten ee Bar Ve eve ERES Ey decks SEED RECEN EET Le esee tante ant ane ee 152 Bluse E 152 MMEMory RDIRectory 152 EMMEMOfy STORG STAW Ci are ee ere d vete ere m aes 152 OUTPUEtAFIXed RANGe EOWOr ia sans 154 OQUTPut AFIXed RANGe UBPGI merci earn daa hee 154 FOUTIPUGAMODG ies tin err er E Pte ne RE ever E Fe eR EH n e Fe XE RUE eet e eR ERE REOR 153 QU JP M 153 OUTPUT STATS IN cases woe hee cae a cae esee declaren e ME Ed OUTPut lt hw
78. savrcltxt in the user directory MMEM LOAD STAT 4 var user test savrcltxt o Activate the instrument setting of the file test savrcltxt RCL 4 Working with Files and Directories 1 3 Read out all files in the specified directory MMEM CAT usb user Response 127145265 175325184 test DIR 0 temp DIR 0 readme txt ASC 1324 state savrcltxt STAT 5327 waveform wv BIN 2342 the directory usb user contains the subdirectories test and temp as well as the files readme txt state savrcltxt and waveform wv which have differ ent file types Tip To query only the subdirectories of the current or specified directory perform MMEM DCAT usb user Response test temp To query only the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory perform MMEM DCAT LENG usb user Response 2 To query the number of files in the current or specified directory perform MMEM CAT LENG usb user Response 3 Create a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory MMEMory Subsystem MMEM MDIR usb new 4 Copy the file state to a new file MMEM COPY var user state savrcltxt usb new 5 Rename the file scate MMEM MOVE state savrcltxt state new savrcltxt 6 Remove the test directory MMEM RDIR usb test 11 10 4 Remote Control Commands IMMEMO hy eno m
79. the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 See Available Instruments on page 48 INSTruments COUNt Queries the number of the currently available instruments Return values lt Count gt Example Usage Manual operation float Range 0 to 12 See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Query only See Available Instruments on page 48 INSTruments EACCess STATe State Locks the instruments meaning the instrument is reserved and can be operated exclusively from the remote PC that sent this SCPI command Tip It is recommended to lock the instrument prior to further configuration Parameters State Example Manual operation List of BOOL values Locklnstrt1 LocklnstrZ2 0 1 0FF ON See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 See Exclusive Access on page 51 INSTruments MAPPing FILE File Saves the list of the available instruments in a mapping file Mapping files are stored with the predefined file extension map the file extension may be omitted The file is saved in the default directory Use the command MMEM CDIRectory to change the default directory or specify the complete path R amp S SGMA GUI Settings Parameters lt File gt string Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Export on page 48
80. the following example we assume that a remote PC with installed R amp S SGMA GUI on it is connected to a LAN and that the remote PC and the instruments are switched on For more information refer to chapter 2 3 Connecting an External PC and Devices on page 19 LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 Trigger the scan function to search for instruments connected to the remote computer via all of the available interfaces EEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 ck 2 2 2 2 ko INSTruments SCAN HNPRefix rssg scan returns only instruments with hostname beginning with rssg INSTruments SCAN 1 OPC Programming Examples KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKK KKK KKK Query the number of available instruments and the settings of each configured instrument instrument type symbolic name remote channel used serial number hostname IP address Adjust settings if required LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 ko ko ko kckckok INSTruments COUNt Response 3 INSTruments TYPE Response SGU SGS SGT INSTruments NAME Response SGU 100002 SGS 100006 SGT 100008 INSTruments SERial Respo
81. the protective circuit for RF output Usage Event SOURce Subsystem 11 12 SOURce Subsystem ESOURcSESET Tings APPLYEIMMedliate cerit rn rot eene recie 155 ES URES FREQueneYECWIFIXed u 4 een ea 155 FSOURESIIRAlsEEh gt un eek AD 155 Isi BI Cos 3 i cs COUN rp a aia 155 SOURce SETTings APPLy IMMediate Applies the signal settings and outputs the signal See chapter 11 14 SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem on page 158 for a descrip tion of the setting process Usage Event Manual operation See Confirm External LO Settings on page 76 SOURce FREQuency CWIFIXed lt Cw gt Sets the RF frequency at the RF output connector of the instrument Parameters lt Cw gt float Range 1E 6 to 40E 9 Increment 1E 3 RST 1E 9 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Manual operation See Frequency on page 57 SOURce TRAits lt ch gt Queries for a list of values for the corresponding trait The following values values are available for the channel number e 1 queries the upper edge frequencies for the frequency bands e 2 queries the upconverter frequency multiplication factors for each band e 3 queries if the bypass mode is active for each band e 4 queries the pulsmodulation performed in LO for each band e 5 queries the AM signal allowed for each band e 6 queries the PM PhiM signal allowed for each band SOURce TRAits
82. toute atteinte la sant Avant le traitement m canique et ou thermique ou le d montage du produit il faut imp rativement observer la section Elimination des d chets point 1 1171 0000 43 08 Page 5 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Selon les fonctions certains produits tels que des syst mes de radiocommunication RF peuvent produire des niveaux lev s de rayonnement lectromagn tique tant donn la vuln rabilit de l enfant na tre les femmes enceintes doivent tre prot g es par des mesures appropri es Les porteurs de stimulateurs cardiaques peuvent galement tre menac s par les rayonnements lectromagn tiques L employeur l exploitant est tenu d valuer et de rep rer les lieux de travail soumis un risque particulier d exposition aux rayonnements et de pr venir les dangers ventuels En cas d incendie il se peut que le produit d gage des mati res toxiques gaz liquides etc susceptibles de nuire la sant Il faut donc en cas d incendie prendre des mesures ad quates comme par exemple le port de masques respiratoires et de v tements de protection Si un produit laser est int gr dans un produit Rohde amp Schwarz par exemple lecteur CD DVD il ne faut pas utiliser de r glages ou fonctions autres que ceux d crits dans la documentation produit pour viter tout dommage corporel par exemple caus par rayon laser Classes CEM selon EN 55011 CISPR 11 selon EN 55022
83. up or down The man tissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENS FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENS FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Units For physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are e G giga e MA mega MOHM MHZ e K kilo M milli e U micro N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special numeric values The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values In the case of a query the numeric value is provided e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value e DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command e UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step The step width can be specifi
84. you can use in your own remote control program Additionally an example file is provided SguDriverDemo c Building the example program Linux 1 Copyfolders InstrumentDriver and SguDriverDemo to your hard disk 2 Goto folder Build 3 On the command line enter cmake 4 Enter make Advanced Remote Control Using PCle Folder Build should now contain the executable SguDriverDemo Building the example program Windows 1 Copyfolders InstrumentDriver and SguDriverDemo to your hard disk 2 Open SguDriverDemo vcpro with Visual Studio 3 Build the program Running the example program gt On the command line enter SguDri Where verDemo RESOURCESTRING cmd e RESOURCESTRING is the Visa resource string of your instrument e g TCPIP ipaddress 5025 SOCKET Or PCIE 0x162f 0x132e serialno INSTR Where ipaddress is the IP addre serialno is its serial number ss or hostname of your instrument and e cmdis an optional command see table The following table list the available commands Command Description Usage q Quit f value Set frequency f Query frequency 1 value Set level 1 Query level r value Set RF state value 0 1 ON OFF r Query RF state If you enter an additional optional command SguDriverDemo Will execute it and enter a loop waiting for further commands Example TCPIP 10 111 11 44 5025 SOCKI L
85. 1 as long as scan is running O indi cates completed scan process Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Scan on page 48 CL INSTruments SCAN HNPRefix lt Prefix gt Sets the prefix the searched host names begin with Parameters lt Prefix gt string Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Scan LAN instruments with host name prefix on page 49 a INSTruments SERial lt Serial gt Enters the serial number as instrument s identification while using the USB interface for remote control Parameters Serial lt SerialNumberinstr 1 gt SerialNumberlnstrz2 Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Serial Number on page 51 INSTruments TYPE Type Selects the instrument s family Parameters Type List of CHAR Data lt Typelnstr 1 gt lt Typelnstr 2 gt Example See chapter 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 128 Manual operation See Available Instruments on page 48 Cleaning 12 Maintenance 12 1 The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance Only cleaning the instrument is essential Follow the ins
86. 147 MMEMory SATal g lEN SIR ne ea an 148 3MMEMOTYIDDIREGIORY 2 148 Musee e HH 148 MMEMON DATA RR 149 MMEMory ET87 NT jooo E 150 MME MON DCATA OG LENG ee aaa ac 150 INMMEMON DELe te ngaa an n aa 150 d uso T it ann creme naine date daadaa A aaae aand 151 dut eO IECIT 151 NMEMON MD Rectory RE 151 SIME MOV MOVE coi 152 VIDA GIy SSNS os di da 152 MMENO RD RECO Messer AAA 152 IMMEMG STORE STATE oo ia A une 152 Returns the content of a particular directory Query parameters lt path gt string String parameter to specify the directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory The path may be relative or absolute Return values lt UsedDiskSpace gt Byte size of all files in the directory lt FreeDiskSpace gt Remaining disk space in bytes MMEMory Subsystem lt Filelnfo gt lt NameFileN gt lt SuffixFileN gt lt SizeFileN gt List of files separated by commas lt NameFileN gt Name of the file lt SuffixFileN gt Type of the file Possible suffixes are ASCii BINary DIRectory lt SizeFileN gt Size of the file in bytes Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Query only MMEMory CATalog LENGth lt Path gt Returns the number of files in the current or in the specified directory Query pa
87. 5 2 standard These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi ces The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands A o p 130 uoi 130 kc y EUM 131 us 131 cp ETE E 131 OPE soos TIT 131 OPT UT 131 i ni 132 oj Aa Ea Eta di 132 REL ads 132 ROT une 132 Ea A E A E E E E A E 133 ORD nen ee 133 cof e TEE 133 x ric we m 133 ull e AP SE aya Eai A AEE S EEE SPEER 133 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 Common Commands ESR Event status read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero Return values lt Contents gt Range 0
88. 96 R Rackmountirig 5 eerte ries di 16 Readjust Ready state sense 17 Recall instrument settings nenn 132 151 Recall intermediate occnnnocococnncconocooooncncnnnonannnonnnncnnno 132 Recommendations remote control programming Reducing power consumption ii Remote control BASICS C 188 Connect E Programming examples 122 Rename File ne one eoe eto 152 Reset instrument settings ssssssssssss 18 135 Reset values REMOTE a ete D iver eeu RL is 132 Resource string MISC s edet ba one E TIER Resource strings Restart Restart nietWOIk uice retener ve ana RF 50 Ohm Connector a nn mieu neds 28 RF frequency ASA A een 66 Modest ada 66 RF ON Cy RF output level k S Save instrument settings ssssssuss 133 152 Save intermediate 133 SCPI Eirormessag es occasio vesc te i nto ondes 185 Parameters xx aw 193 Syntax 190 VERSION 104 SCPI confirmed commands 188 Searching a new instrument sinodinis 59 Security DassWOEG c i interea hinh one es 86 87 Security settings ACCODL Lario 86 Change password Confirm password 85 LAN connection
89. ALC SONCe Briefly activates automatic level control for correction purposes Usage Event Manual operation See Readjust on page 68 SOURce POWer ATTenuation RFOFf MODE lt Mode gt Selects the state which the attenuator assumes when the instrument is switched on Parameters lt Mode gt MAX FIXed RST MAX SOURce POWer Subsystem SOURce POWer LMODe lt LevMode gt Selects the level mode Parameters lt LevMode gt NORMal LNOise LDIStortion NORMal automatic selection of the best settings LNOISe settings for lowest noise LDIStortion settings for lowest distortions RST NORMal Example see chapter 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 126 Manual operation See Mode on page 66 SOURce POWer SCHaracteristic lt Characteristic gt Selects the characteristic for the level setting Parameters lt Characteristic gt AUTO UNINterrupted CVSWr USER MONotone UNINterrupted Uninterrupted Level setting CVSWr Con stant VSWR MONotone Strictly Monotone RST AUTO Example see chapter 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 126 Manual operation See Setting Characteristic on page 67 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Amplitude Sets the RF level at the RF output connector of the instrument Parameters lt Amplitude gt float
90. COUNt Queries the number of trait lists SOURce IQ Subsystem Return values Count float Usage Query only 11 13 SOURce IQ Subsystem The IQ Impairment remote commands are available only for R amp S SGU B120V B140V ESCURCANESTA TO e veaaoteds 156 ESOURce Q IMPairmentlGQEatio cio 156 ESOURceLEIGQ IMPaitmentEEAKadge ll area 157 ESOURGe HO dMPaimientEEAKagaQ urn 157 SOURcel 1Q 1MPairment QUADrature ANGLE 157 SOURCE OAMPaltimeneS TANG coma cess teneo ta e ee aea ee exe ee enean bas 157 LSOURGE 1 OIC zzril Tolo EP D 158 SOURce IQ STATe State Switches the I Q modulation on and off Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Options R amp S SGU B120V B140V Manual operation See Mod State on page 57 SOURce IQ IMPairment IQRatio lt IqRatio gt Sets the ratio of modulation to Q modulation gain imbalance The input may be either in dB or 96 An input in percent is rounded to the closest valid value in dB A query returns the value in dB Parameters lt IqRatio gt float Range 1 to 1 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Options R amp S SGU B120V 140V Manual operation See Gain Imbalance on page 73 SOURce lQ Subsystem SOURce IQ 1MPairment LEAKage l lt I gt SOURce
91. DBE itineri treni nitet stie in cn cet rers toto een e ste tee Do ee pes 163 SOURCG POWer RANGe OWOTF niter tier beri npn ette pee testen teet ee eee epi cpi ERREEN 163 ESOURcel POWerRANGe UPP SS tnt en ete trt tette nennen da 163 SOURce POWer SCbHaracteristic orar trennt cols 161 E SOUREEFPOWerFLEVel MMediate OFFSet 3 0er 162 SOURce POWerf LEVell IMMediate AMPLitude ss 161 SOURce SETTings APPLy IMMediate 1 intor Rennes nennen 155 SOURCce TRAS COU hrec eran 155 SOURCE TRAIS SONS rt a naar aan Aa ann HUY 155 Index Symbols eor 199 OPC 199 RST 208 WAI See 2 199 Ivar directory 144 180 Adjustment failed 186 182 Adjustment data missing ssssss 186 183 Adjustment data invalid sessssse 186 200 Cannot access hardware 186 201 Hardware revision out of date 186 202 Cannot access the EEPROM 186 203 Invalid EEPROM data 186 204 Driver initialization failed 186 244 No current list 186 242 Unknown list type specified se 186 460 Cannot open file 461 Cannot write file 462 Cannot read file 463 Filename missing 464 Invalid
92. ERRor ALL Each call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Remote Control Basics 14 1 5 8 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except of RST and SYSTem PRESet affect the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 14 6 Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL RST or STA CLS voltage SDC SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Device Tem PRE Set Clear Clear Set Selected Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear PPE yes Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing yes yes yes and input buffer 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PR
93. Install firmware package Operation Selects the desired maintenance operation Select Package Available only for Operation gt Install Firmware Package Selects the firmware package to be installed see also chapter 9 5 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instrument on page 100 Network Settings Update All Available only for Operation gt Install Firmware Package Enable this function to perform a simultaneous firmware update on all instruments that are in active state and are connected to this controller Note A firmware update and the required subsequent restart and the automatically ini tiated internal adjustment process of the controller may be a time consuming operation This feature accelerates the update process and the required restart of the external PC can be executed once after the update operation of all instruments is completed Security Password Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a security password The default is 123456 Note It is highly recommended to change the default security password before con necting the instrument to the network To change the security password select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Security gt Change Security Password The settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Accept the selected operation and perform the required procedure 8 7 Network Settings The ins
94. KKKK KKK KKK Programming Examples UNL 12345 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Performance In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established CkCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Reset the instrument first EEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 RST CLS SYSTem PRESet RESTart SYSTem FPReset 11 CKCkCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Lock the instrument to the controller LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck 2 ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 LOCK 12345 Lock the instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused 4 CkCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Query the level that can be set without adjustments of the attenuator ck ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 0k 00k 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
95. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK SYSTem SERRor Programming Examples Query static errors SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT SYSTem ERRor COUNT SYSTem ERRor NEXT STATus QUEue NEXT SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL SYSTem ERRor ALL Query error queue Fr cC Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Query system information ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk SYSTem VERSion SYSTem OSYStem ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK ko RARA ARA RAR KARA Activate eco mode ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 ko kockok SYSTem EMODe EM1 KKEKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK EEE KKK KKK Unlock the instrument ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck kk Ck Ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK UNL 12345 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between th
96. Manual operation See IP Address on page 89 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE Mode Selects manual or automatic setting of the IP address Parameters Mode AUTO STATic RST AUTO SYSTem Subsystem Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE AUTO the IP address is assigned automatically DHCP Manual operation See Address Mode on page 88 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress lt MacAddress gt Queries the MAC address of the network adapter Return values lt MacAddress gt string Example SYST COMM NETW MAC queries the MAC address Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart Restarts the network connection to the instrument terminates the connection and sets it up again Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus Queries the network configuration state Return values State 0 1 OFF ON Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname lt Hostname gt Sets the individual host name of the R amp S SGU Note it is recommended that you do not change the host name in order to avoid prob lems with the networdk connection However if you change the host name be sure to use an unique name The host name is a protected parameter To change it first disable protection level 1 with command SYSTem PROTect ch STATe on page 176 Parameters lt Hostname gt string Example SYS
97. NABle part of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 14 3 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error
98. No error i e the error queue is empty positive value Positive error numbers denote device specific errors negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI Example SYST ERR CODE ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Only the error number is returned and not the entire error text SYSTem Subsystem Return values lt Next gt string 0 No error i e the error queue is empty positive value Positive error numbers denote device specific errors negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI Example SYST ERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor COUNt Queries the number of entries in the error queue If the error queue is empty 0 is returned Return values Count string Example SYST ERR COUN queries the number of entries in the error queue Response 1 One error has occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor NEXT Queries the error event queue for the oldest item and removes it from the queue The response consists of an error number and a short description of the error
99. OGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA TOR clears the output buffer 14 1 6 General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Command sequence As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Other wise the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first see also Preventing Overlapping Execution Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service 14 2 Telnet program examples request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis ters Especially in the test phase of a controller program the e
100. R amp S SGU100A SGMA Upconverter User Manual IE AL 1176 7726 02 06 Test amp Measurement User Manual This document describes the R amp S SGU100A stock no 1418 2005 02 and its options e R amp S9SGU B26 1418 3401 02 R amp S SGU B120 120V 1418 2605 02 1418 2657 02 e R amp S SGU B140 140V 1418 2870 02 1418 2928 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of the operating system LINUX and other valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9SGU100A is abbreviated as R amp S SGU R amp S SGS100A is abbre viated as R amp S SGS R amp S SGMA GUI is abbreviated as R amp S SGMA GUI R amp S FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions A
101. Register SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough over view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 14 2 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 0 1 Not used 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error mes sage This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control 3 QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENT bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be
102. S E Search New password NINE 44 NTRansition P Number of licences nico sense 82 Numeric values irl 194 O OI H Old password Oper tingisysiem ac 19 Operation complete Remote nun een 131 Option Hardware eei cet rentis e ee gs 80 R amp S SGU B120V B140V 3 428 Software cs eene 80 Option key 1 82 Options Identification remote 131 OUTPUL CONMECIOR eerie resinae cnet tb v ern sa ci nen Deren Output quelle s ccm prse tbid e eeu elements Overlapping commands Preventiva P PACKING oer t rH A Rh rer 183 Parallel poll register enable Rem le e rd da 132 Parameters Block data anna ia re etus 196 Boole mS 195 Kiel M 193 Special numeric values 194 SUNG 196 WON EE 195 Bp eec ET 194 PCIe Connectihg viii t in eire i Connector ud PEP te RAR tt re mas Polarity Pulse imodulallon 2 ccce vee eesti 74 Power On KEY races POWERSWIICH een aient PRE nues Preset instrument settings 2 PIOUCUOELD n iieri erkenne Protocol MOL cesis AR cec otitis 109 PTRANSIHON a en cid t ei nd 203 Q QuOffSeL oe AN 70 Quadrature offset x 71 74 Queries ois nter cba la 188 197 IIO MEME 207 Question mark 196 197 Questionable status register 205 206 Quotation Mark 28 26 os Eee b ee oa ae 1
103. SGS and an R amp S SG A 102 10 Network and Remote Control Operation 103 10 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols ss 103 10 1 1 Remote Control Programs and Libraries 104 10 1 2 LAN INCH ACC ua 106 10 1 2 1 VISA Resource Strings zn a en 107 10 1 2 2 HiSEIP Protocol era redeem eee ee delere oerte Et 108 10 123 VXIETT PrOIOCOl iuo er n teri rer tr rre ee her d ec dee ede 109 10 1 24 Socket COMMUNICAION 1222245 eerta talado 109 10 1 3 USB Interface orci a 109 10 1 4 PCI Express Interface reri ences ar ertt ea 110 10 2 Starting a Remote Control Session eese enne 111 10 2 1 How to Find the VISA Resource String ene 111 10 2 2 Example Remote Control over LAN using Socket Communication 112 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCIe eene 113 10 3 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via PCIe 113 10 3 2 Configuring the Controller eicit nnd 114 10 3 2 1 Building and Installing the Hardware Driver naar rca rnnnn nn 114 10 3 2 2 Making Shared Libraries Accessible 115 10 3 2 3 Bullding a Program ne rca ne 115 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and the Instrument nana nnnnnn 116 10 3 4 Enabling Fast Settings iore a 117 10 4 Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket 118 10 4 1 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via Fast Socket nen 118
104. Sets the baudrate for the serial remote control interface Parameters Baud 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 RST 115200 Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 115200 determines 115200 baudrate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity lt Parity gt Sets the parity for the serial remote control interface Parameters lt Parity gt NONE ODD EVEN RST NONE Example SYST COMM SER PAR NONE selects parity NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs lt SBits gt Sets the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface Parameters lt SBits gt 112 RST 1 Example SYST COMM SER SBIT 2 selects 2 stop bits SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Queries the user directory that means the directory the instrument stores user files on Return values lt PathUser gt string Example SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Response var user Usage Query only 11 19 TEST Subsystem SYSTem OSYStem Queries the operating system of the instrument Return values lt OperSystem gt string Example SYSTem OSYStem Response Linux Usage Query only SYSTem PROTect lt ch gt STATe lt State gt lt Key gt Activates deactivates the specified protection level Parameters lt State gt select RST 1 Setting parameters lt Key gt integer The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activati
105. Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG Trigger Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem Usage Event WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also command synchronization and OPC Usage Event General Commands 11 3 General Commands IREMGS OPMOd i sil TEE aaa OE DE ue 134 jocis M IEEE 134 STANGDY OR H R dit 134 BOCK H IUE 134 BU INGO GK 135 REMote OPMode lt OpMode gt Sets the remote operation mode of the instrument Parameters lt OpMode gt STDalone EXTension STDalone The instrument acts standalone EXTension The instrument is controlled by another Rohde amp Schwarz instru ment This parameter is used by the SGMA GUI to disable set tings when the instrument is in extension mode RST
106. Starting a Remote Control Session 10 2 Starting a Remote Control Session The instrument and the controller have to be connected with a suitable cable and switched on A remote control program must open a connection to the instrument before it can send commands to and receive device responses from the instrument Instrument Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the defined interface address See chapter 10 1 2 LAN Interface on page 106 chapter 10 1 3 USB Interface on page 109 or chapter 10 1 4 PCI Express Interface on page 110 for details The VISA resource strings are indicated in the SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument name gt Setup gt Remote Channels dialog 10 2 1 How to Find the VISA Resource String To find the VISA resource strings of your instrument gt Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument name gt Setup gt Remote Channels The Remote Channel Settings dialog shows all specified resource strings of the supported remote control interfaces R amp S SGU100A Network and Remote Control Operation 10 2 2 Example Remote Control over LAN using Socket Communication This section provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over telnet protocol and a simple sockets based program example that can be further devel oped see also chapter 14 2 Telnet program examples on page 209 Basic knowledge of programming and o
107. Subsystem Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 90 SYSTem COMMunicate PClexpress RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the PCle interface Return values Resource string Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 90 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via LAN interface using TCP IP socket protocol Return values lt Resource gt string Example SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Response TCPIP 10 113 1 150 5025 SOCKET Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 90 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB interface Response USB 72 000000 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 90 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource Queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface This string is used for remote control of the instrument Return values lt Resource gt string SYSTem Subsystem Example SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource queries the VISA resource string Response ASRL1 INSTR Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD Baud
108. TALE SM Rd da de a D tee ce 177 TEST ALL STARt 177 STEST KEY Board STATE en e i e Po RE E Enero E D Eee A ere onera ts 177 UNIT ANG n 178 UNIT POWER sr a 178 UNLOCK ne mH 135 SOURceEEREQUODCVEOWIEIXBd its 155 SOURcGe IQ CRESITACIO cir ttn rr nenne rere te i ta en art SOURce J IQ IMPairment IQRatio E SOURGEHIQ IMPaimment LEAK AGG sli ca oett eere ATIAN ey rb dann rasen errang reger Ten 157 SOURce IQ IMPairmentLEAKage Q cion nennen ta 157 SOURce IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe ien nennt tritt eniti 157 SOURceLriiQ IMPaimmetit S TANTO eer deporte erue nas sera sauna kx nV Rer ek de ist euere CEN ETICA Es 157 ESQURCO IQ STATO ee tee e ope mete t ge ea 156 SOURGcel LOSGINator FR QUENCE Eo ege teer erro toe ote rtc ne i e due Ere Enea 159 SOURCE EOSCIAIORPOW f 159 SOURCeEPOWerAEC DSENSILVILy tct aaa 160 Bsieluis epe ibenzio of dit a 160 S9OURCceErPOWSEAECDSTATS a eee oasis UI Ee eed er 160 SOURcCe POWerATTen ation RFOFEMOPDDBE ttt trennt etre hne ete an aa hai 160 ESOURCEPOWERLIMIAMPEItUdel 2 recenter trea E Ann aT 162 Bsieliteipaelidep 161 SOURCE POWE PEP cours ea een 162 SOURCSEPOWSTPOWM
109. Tem PROTectl STATe OFF 123456 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork HOSTname SIGGEN sets the individual computer name of the R amp S SGU Manual operation See Hostname on page 88 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway Gateway Sets the IP address of the default gateway Parameters Gateway string Range 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway 1 22354 sets the IP address of the default gateway Manual operation See Default Gateway on page 89 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK Mask Sets the subnet mask Parameters Mask string Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 255 255 0 0 determines the subnet mask Manual operation See Subnet Mask on page 89 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource Queries the VISA resource string used for remote control of the instrument with VXI 11 protocol Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource Response TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 90 SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource Queries the VISA resource string used for remote control of the instrument with HiSLIP protocol Return values lt Resource gt string Example SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource Response TCPIP 192 1 2 3 hislip0 INSTR Usage Query only SYSTem
110. Test Software Options 8 1 Hardware Configuration In the Hardware Config dialog the installed assemblies together with their variants and revision states can be displayed for servicing purposes gt To access the Hardware Config dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Hardware Config Software Options The dialog is a table that lists the installed assemblies It is divided into the sections Common Assembly and e RF Assembly Assembly The tables list the installed assemblies Assembly Name of the assembly Part Number Part Number of the assembly Serial Number Serial Number of the assembly Revision Revision state of assembly Remote command n a for R amp S SGT 8 2 Software Options The Software Options dialog shows the firmware version of the instrument software as well as all installed hardware and software options Software Options Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a keycode The acti vation code is supplied with the software option An instruction on how to install options is described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument Most hardware options need to be installed at an authorized Rohde amp Schwarz service cen ter To access the Software Options dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Software Options The dialog is divided into the following sec
111. UI software e To operate the device by a remote control program See chapter 10 Network and Remote Control Operation on page 103 This section describes how to configure the LAN interface It includes the following top ics chapter 2 3 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 21 chapter 2 3 2 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 22 chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 22 Connecting the Instrument to the Network There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument e Anon dedicated network Ethernet connection from the instrument to an existing network e A dedicated network connection Point to point connection between the instru ment and a single computer In both cases an IP address has to be assigned to the instrument and the computer see chapter 2 3 2 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 22 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network gt Connect the instrument to the network or to a single PC 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 Connecting an External PC and Devices If the instrument is connected to the LAN the operating system automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP
112. Use the LOCK command for this purpose 11 1 1 Performing General Tasks for Instrument Setup In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established ES KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Reset the instrument first KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK RST CLS SYSTem PRESet RESTart SYSTem FPReset ES KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Lock the instrument to the controller KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKAKKK LOCK 12345 Lock the instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Launch diagnostic LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Response D TEMP UP20 D TEMP CPU DIAGNostic MEASure POINt D TEMP UP20 ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 0k C000 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 2 ck 2 2 2 2 2 kc kockok Query the entries in the error queue KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
113. WN sico ie 37 Setups for Instrument Control 37 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 2 1 6 1 2 2 6 1 2 3 6 1 2 4 6 1 3 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 2 1 6 4 2 2 6 4 2 3 6 4 2 4 6 4 2 5 6 4 2 6 6 4 2 7 6 4 2 8 6 4 3 6 4 4 Manual Operation from the R amp S SGMA GUI sss 37 Remote Control from a Controller 37 Control of an R amp S SGU from a compatible R amp S Signal Generator 38 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 38 Direct Connection een 39 Connection in a Company Network ss 40 Connection with a PCle Switch ic eid debent rect 43 Understanding the R amp S SGMA GUI Software 45 Operating Menu and Toolbar sise 45 aqu H 46 Setup MOU Mer 47 Configure Instruments 47 Add Edit Instruments sr 49 Software Options Dialogue 52 Reset SGMA cs mena a inerte nan 52 alo A ini 52 Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar 53 INTO DAOG P 53 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar 54 C La 55 Working with R amp S SGMA GU uunuessnsnssnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnn 58 Storing and Loading Settings 58 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI eene 58 How to Automatically Add New In
114. a a company network 4 On the connected remote PC start the R amp S SGMA GUI software application The main panel of the application and the configure instruments dialog open The R amp S SGU is added automatically to the instruments list and to the main panel of the R amp S SGMA GUI software The main panel provides a quick access to the main settings of the configured and activated instruments The display shows one row per instrument with the instru ment specific settings The rows comprise the instrument the connection state the used frequency and power level and the state of the RF output and the modulator File Setup Help jasua reg 1 000 000 000 000os RE un Svswor2 1 00 00 00 oore Bi WRF 5 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel the green indicator in front of the instrument s name confirms that there is a connection between the instrument and the remote PC and that the instrument is recognized by the software 6 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select the row corresponding to the instrument to be configured and select Instrument Name gt Preset to restore the predefined instrument s settings gt Loa scum rey 1000000000 om By SAF Seusonor e 1000 000000 oJjcw Bf MF 100 7 Select SGMA GUI gt R amp S SGU gt Freq 15 GHz Lev 10 dBm RF gt On R amp S SGU as a Standalone Upconverter 1 000 000 000 000 15 000 000 000 000 chz
115. a la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n EI dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 08 Page 10 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispa
116. a subdirectory is created in the default directory This command can also be used to create a directory tree MMEMory Subsystem Setting parameters lt Directory gt string String parameter to specify the new directory Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Event MMEMory MOVE lt SourceFile gt lt DestinationFile gt Moves an existing file to a new location or if no path is specified renames an existing file Setting parameters lt SourceFile gt string String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved lt DestinationFile gt string String parameters to specify the name of the new file Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MSIS lt Msis gt Defines the drive or network resource in the case of networks for instruments with windows operating system using msis MSIS Mass Storage Identification String Note Instruments with Linux operating system ignore this command since Linux does not use drive letter assignment Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory RDIRectory lt Directory gt Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system If no directory is specified the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory Setting parameters lt Directory gt string String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted Example See Working with Files and Directories
117. aae e at 167 STATUSQUEStionabl PT REMGIIOMN 4 5 5 2 9 12092 2 ese 29 0o A vinee Ign Py P De Iu RR sine 167 SS TA TUBIQUE WSR zum PI 167 STATUS Subsystem STATus OPERation CONDition Condition Sets the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the current hardware status Parameters Condition string Example STATus OPERation CONDition queries the Status Operation Condition register STATus OPERation ENABle Enable Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus OPERation register This setting deter mines which events of the Status Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Parameters Enable string Example STAT OPER ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte STATus OPERation EVENt Event Queries the content of the EVEN part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out Parameters Event string Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the STATus OPERation EVENt register STATus OPERation NTRansition
118. abling Fast Settings gt To enable the special PCI express feature fast settings enable the function rssgu UseFastSettings ViSession instrumentHandle ViBoolean fastEnabled ViBoolean asynchronousEnabled included in the instru ment driver Settings for some parameters like level and frequency will accelerate To disable the fast settings call the function rssgu_UseFastSettings with argu ment fastEnabled false Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket 10 4 Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket 10 4 1 Fast Settings The Socket interface can be utilized not only to transfer text messages e g SCPI com mands but also to carry register based remote control messages The latter mode is called fast settings mode The Fast Socket communication is based on the Ethernet protocol which does not support routing Therefore a controller PC can only control devices within its own network segment using the Fast Socket method To use the advantage of the fast settings the following prerequisites must be fulfilled e On Windows operating systems the fast socket driver must be installed e The application program must be run with root administrator rights e The fast settings must be enabled by means of the function rssgu useFastSettings see also chapter 10 3 4 Enabling Fast Settings on page 117 The instrument driver will automatically use the fast settings method whenever possi ble currently only for the parameter
119. ac es que par des pi ces d origine Apr s chaque remplacement de pi ces concernant la s curit une v rification de s curit doit tre effectu e contr le visuel v rification du conducteur de protection mesure de la r sistance d isolement et du courant de fuite essai de fonctionnement Cela permet d assurer le maintien de la s curit du produit Batteries et accumulateurs cellules Si les instructions concernant les batteries et accumulateurs cellules ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respect es cela peut provoquer des explosions des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant entra ner la mort La manipulation de batteries et accumulateurs contenant des lectrolytes alcalins par exemple cellules de lithium doit tre conforme la norme EN 62133 1171 0000 43 08 Page 6 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Les cellules ne doivent tre ni d mont es ni ouvertes ni r duites en morceaux Ne jamais exposer les cellules ou batteries la chaleur ou au feu Ne pas les stocker dans un endroit o elles sont expos es au rayonnement direct du soleil Tenir les cellules et batteries au sec Nettoyer les raccords sales avec un chiffon sec et propre Ne jamais court circuiter les cellules ou batteries Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas tre gard es dans une bo te ou un tiroir o elles peuvent se court circuiter mutuellement ou tre court circuit es par d autres mat riaux conducteurs Une cellule ou ba
120. accessed via an unambiguous com puter name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed For instruction on how to find out the default computer name refer to chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 To query and change a computer name To avoid violations and to make use of the easy identification provided by the computer name it is recommended to keep the default hostname unchanged 1 Open SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Network Settings dialog The computer name is displayed under Hostname 2 Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Protection and enable the Pro tection Level 1 The parameter Hostname in the Network Settings dialog is now enabled for configuration 3 Change the Hostname 4 Press the POWER ON STAND BY key to restart the instrument Note The Factory Preset function restores the factory value of the parameter Hostname How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instrument 9 5 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instru ment You can update the firmware of the R amp S SGU Firmware Installation through the R amp S SGMA GUI If an update to a new firmware version is required for both the R amp S SGMA GUI and the instrument it is mandatory that the new instrument s firmware is installed prior to the update of the R amp S SGMA GUI to the new version 1 Selec
121. active instrument function e g a Sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables transition from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys amp NREN Not Remote Enable Disables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command To re activate automatic transition use amp GTR amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more param eters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics keywords Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax 14 1 3 1 Syntax for Common Commands Remote Control Basics Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument i
122. ales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueida
123. alues Command string All of the commands described below return the values in the parameter s default unit VERsion Number Shows the command set version with which the instrument is compliant OUTP STATe Number Shows the state required of the local oscillator SOUR FREQ Number Shows the frequency required of the local oscillator SOUR POW lt Number gt Shows the power required of the external local oscillator PROG CREate lt Text gt Asks the controller to create a progress bar PROG REName lt Text gt Asks the controller to rename the progress bar PROG REMove Asks the controller to delete the most recently created progress bar PROG UPDate Number Shows the current progress value in percent NOP NO DATA Intermediate message No action is required CAL HREQ STOP End of the calibration procedure Example See table 11 1 Usage Query only CALibration IQModulator STARt Starts an internal I Q adjustment Query the result of the adjustment with the SCPI command CALibration IQModulator RESult See Calibration process of the R amp S SGU on page 137 for a step by step description of the calibration process Usage Event CALibration IQModulator RESult Queries the result of the internal I Q adjustment Start the adjustment with the SCPI command CALibration IQModulator STARt Return values Result 0 1 RUNning STOPped CALibration Subsystem Usage Query only CALibration IQM
124. amp S SGS extending its frequency range In this setup a controller does not need to access the R amp S SGU directly Instead the R amp S SGS acts as a controller to the R amp S Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU SGU The generator performs all required settings automatically depending on the required output signal parameters This chapter gives an overview of how to connect the instruments For an example of how to use the instruments in extension mode refer to chapter 4 First steps with the Instrument on page 30 5 2 1 Direct Connection The R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU can be connected through a direct connection as shown in figure 5 4 Direct connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU R amp S SGS R amp S SGU Fig 5 4 Direct connection of an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 1 Connect the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU directly using one of the following options USB cable Use a Type Micro A connector for R amp S SGS and a Type Micro B connector for R amp S SGU See also chapter 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB on page 23 b LAN cable No additional cable considerations are required c PCle cable Refer to chapter 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and the Instru ment on page 116 for cable requirements and setup information Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The R amp S SGS automatically identifies the connected R amp S SGU as its extension
125. an three instruments with the same dimensions width and length If you need to stack more than three instruments install them in a rack The overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 500 N e Allinstruments should have the same dimensions width and length If you need to stack smaller instruments on the top the overall load imposed on the lowest instrument must not exceed 250 N e Ifthe instruments have foldable feet fold them in completely Correct Too many instruments Different dimensions Feet folded out Rackmounting The R amp S SGU can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit Order No see data sheet The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit Risk of instrument damage in a rack An insufficient airflow can cause the instrument to overheat which may disturb the operation and even cause damage Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed that the airflow perforations are unimpeded and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm 2 1 5 Switching the Instrument On and Off The R amp S SGU is automatically adapted to the AC voltage supplied There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses The AC SUPPLY AND POWER SWITCH is at the rear of the unit R amp S SGU100A Preparing for Use To connect the AC supply gt Connect the R amp S SGU to the AC power source using the AC power cable deliv ered with the instrument Note The instrument is in
126. and line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM This command line contains two commands Both commands are part of the HCOP command system i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND e Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 559 Remote Control Basics Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command The response 3 5E9 in the
127. apping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Programming Examples This chapter provides simple programming examples for the R amp S SGU The purpose of the examples is to present all commands for a given task In real applications one would rather reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an environment for the development and execution of remote tests To keep the examples Programming Examples as simple as possible only the clean SCPI syntax elements are reported Non exe cutable command lines e g comments start with two characters At the beginning of most remote control programs an instrument p reset is recom mended to set the R amp S SGU to a defined state The commands RST and SYSTem PRESet are equivalent for this purpose CLS also resets the status registers and clears the output buffer It is also recommended to lock the instrument for remote control from the selected con troller prior to further configuration
128. apter 11 14 SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem on page 158 for a descrip tion of the setting process Return values lt Amplitude gt float Range 120 to 25 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Usage Query only Manual operation See Level on page 76 SOURce POWer Subsystem 11 15 SOURce POWer Subsystem SOURCE POWerALEESTA Tela 2a aa 160 SOURce POWerALC DSENSItIVIby iL nn anna nehmen 160 ESOURGCe POWERALBSSONGE 0 ea nen 160 SOURce POWer ATTenuation RFOFFMODE cocoa seen 160 SOURCE POWERLMOBE EUER 161 ESOURCA POWerSCOHaraeteitslic iii lan ch 161 SOURce POWer LEVel MMediate AMPLitude rnrn nnne 161 SOURce POWerf LEVell IMMediate l OFF Set 162 SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude sisi 162 SOURCE POW GIP EP Oo uiid eere neuter EE aa n Cod eaae ceat kd uv dinars 162 ESOURcep POWtsrIPOWBL 21 2 errori rer etae sec Pessac cv esos anu ed revue ce e day ae ded aw eme 163 ESOURCE POWerRANGE LOWER une 163 SOURCE POWE RANGE UPPE 2 een iii 163 SOURce POWer ALC STATe lt State gt Activates deactivates the automatic level control Parameters lt State gt 1 OFFTable ONTable ON RST ONTable SOURce POWer ALC DSENsitivity Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the power detector Parameters lt Sensitivity gt OFF LOW MED HIGH RST OFF SOURce POWer
129. ate Off Description The instrument is shut down Indication All LEDs on the front panel of the instrument are off Booting The instrument boots the operating system and starts the instrument firmware If the previous session was terminated reg ularly the instrument uses the last setup with the relevant instrument settings The green POWER ON STAND BY key blinks Standby The standby power mode keeps the power Switch circuits and the remote control sys tem active In this state it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply In the R amp S SGMA GUI the status indicator in front of the instrument name is red The orange POWER ON STAND BY key is on Ready normal operation The instrument is ready for operation All modules are power supplied In the R amp S SGMA GUI the status indicator in front of the instrument name is green The green POWER ON STAND BY key is on To switch the instrument to standby state gt To switch the instrument to the standby state use one of the following a On the remote PC select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Standby b Press the POWER ON STANDBY key on the front panel of the instrument c Send the SCPI command STANdby The current instruments settings are automatically stored The instrument switches to a power saving mode In the R amp S SGMA GUI the standby state
130. ate NETWork RESource Response TCPIP 10 113 10 187 1NSTR SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Response TCPIP 10 113 10 187 5025 SOCKET SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource Response USB 0x0AAD 0x00ce 100021 INSTR SYSTem COMMunicate PCIexpress RESource Response PCIe 0x162f 0x132 100002 INSTR Fr cC Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK CK TH TA TA TH CK CK TH TH TH TFA TH TFA FH KC k ko ko A KH Query network settings cC Ck ck ck ck KKK KKK ck ck ck KKK KKK KK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname Response rssgu100a100002 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE Response AUTO SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress Response 10 113 10 187 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK Response 255 255 0 0 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway Response 10 113 0 1 ck Ck Ck ck ck KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Unlock the instrument ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck 2 ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 UNL 12345 11 1 5 Configuring Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI This section provides an example of the automation of the R amp S SGMA GUI In
131. ature Queries the delta temperature since the last level adjustment Return values Temperature string Usage Query only 11 6 CONNector Subsystem 1CONNectortTRIGSger MOD ea 141 CONNector TRIGger OMODe Mode Sets the operating mode of the trigger connector Parameters Mode SVALid SNValid PEMSource SVALid SNValid signal valid not valid PEMSource external pulse modulator source Manual operation See Trigger Connector Mode on page 75 11 7 DIAGnostic Subsystem SDIAGHOStIC POINE CA wget EUER 141 DIAGnosticcMEASure POINT en aaa coat teo 142 DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Queries the test points available in the instrument A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble shooting ofthe Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Tasks for Instrument Setup on page 123 Usage Query only Fast Speed Commands DIAGnostic MEASure POINt lt Name gt Triggers a voltage or a temperature measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured value A detailed description of the test points can be found in section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument A list of the available test points can be queried using the command DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Query parameters Name string Return values Val
132. azu f hren dass von dem Produkt die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags ausgeht Bei Verwendung von Verl ngerungsleitungen oder Steckdosenleisten ist sicher zustellen dass diese regelmaBig auf ihren sicherheitstechnischen Zustand berpr ft werden Sofern das Produkt nicht mit einem Netzschalter zur Netztrennung ausger stet ist beziehungsweise der vorhandene Netzschalter zu Netztrennung nicht geeignet ist so ist der Stecker des Anschlusskabels als Trennvorrichtung anzusehen Die Trennvorrichtung muss jederzeit leicht erreichbar und gut Zuganglich sein Ist z B der Netzstecker die Trennvorrichtung darf die L nge des Anschlusskabels 3 m nicht berschreiten Funktionsschalter oder elektronische Schalter sind zur Netztrennung nicht geeignet Werden Produkte ohne Netzschalter in Gestelle oder Anlagen integriert so ist die Trennvorrichtung auf Anlagenebene zu verlagern Benutzen Sie das Produkt niemals wenn das Netzkabel besch digt ist berpr fen Sie regelm Big den einwandfreien Zustand der Netzkabel Stellen Sie durch geeignete SchutzmaBnahmen und Verlegearten sicher dass das Netzkabel nicht besch digt werden kann und niemand z B durch Stolperfallen oder elektrischen Schlag zu Schaden kommen kann Der Betrieb ist nur an TN TT Versorgungsnetzen gestattet die mit h chstens 16 A abgesichert sind h here Absicherung nur nach R cksprache mit der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe Stecken Sie den Stecker nicht in verstaubte oder versch
133. caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado par
134. ced Remote Control Using PCle 3 Enable fast settings see 10 3 4 Configuring the Controller This section focuses on the steps necessary to configure a controller with Linux or Windows operating system O 10 3 2 1 The necessary files are provided on the CD included in the delivery The files are stored in folder software Contents of folder software e InstrumentDriver C source code files which provide a functional application programming interface API to R amp S SGU instruments Required if you want to control an instrument via PCle e LinuxKernelDriver C source code files from which you can build a Linux kernel mode driver for the R amp S SGU PCle remote control interface e SGMA GUI Graphical user interface program for one or more instruments Runs on a remote PC e SguDriverDemo C source code module for a demo program using the instrument driver API e SharedLibraries Dlls Shared libraries Dlls for remote control channels Socket and PCle To be used with the instrument driver Building and Installing the Hardware Driver The hardware driver defines the way to communicate with the instrument via PCle interface For Windows operating systems the hardware driver is installed automatically together with the installation of the R amp S SGMA GUI software See also section Installation of R amp S SGMA GUI Software in the Getting Started man ual For Linux operating system the source code of the driver is
135. clusive Access from another SGMA GUI or controller The instrument is performing a time consuming operation e g a selftest Maximum Frequency The numbers in the rectangular box on the left of the instrument s name indicate the maximum frequency of the instrument Pulse Modulation A JI sign on the left of the instrument s name indicates that the pulse modulation is Switched on Local Oscillator A sign on the left of the instrument s name indicates that the internal Local Oscillator is switched off Instrument Name Displays the alias name of the instrument as selected by the parameter SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Add Edit Instruments gt Symbolic Name A click on this button provides access to a menu tree for configuring the available instrument s settings e g Level settings Main Panel 1 000 000 000 000 cs 1 000 000 000 000 cs FRE Mod 1 000 000 000 000 cs Frequency Sets the RF frequency at the RF output connector of the selected instrument Remote command SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed on page 155 RF ON OFF Activates and deactivates the RF output signal The current state of the RF output activated and deactivated is indicated in the main panel by means of the different block color blue or grey and the status On Off Remote command OUTPut STATe on page 153 Mod State Switches the I Q modulation on and off Remote command SOURce IQ STAT
136. compliance with safety class EN61010 1 Connect the instrument only to a socket with earthing contact To start up the instrument 1 Connect the instrument to the AC supply 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 2 To turn the power on press the main power switch to position On To switch between standby and ready state gt Press the POWER ON STAND BY key briefly to switch the instrument from the standby to ready state or vice versa In ready state the button is green The instrument is ready for operation All mod ules are power supplied and the R amp S SGU initiates its startup procedure In standby state the button is orange The standby power mode keeps the power switch circuits and the remote control system active Start up and booting The instrument boots the operating system and starts the instrument firmware During the booting process the green POWER ON STAND BY key blinks If the previous ses sion was terminated regularly the instrument uses the last setup with the relevant instrument settings Once the startup procedure has been terminated the instrument is ready for operation In the R amp S SGMA GUI select Instrument gt Preset function to return the instrument to its defined reset preset state if the current setup is no longer relevant To customize the start settings use the SGMA GUI gt File gt Save As Open function To shut down the Instrument To shut down the R amp S SGU proceed as described below
137. ct documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers serious injury serious injury moderate injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 08 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in el
138. d dangers Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Notice general danger location O ON OFF Power Observe product documentation gt Caution when handling heavy equipment D Standby indication Danger of electric shock Direct current DC gt 1171 0000 42 08 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault or the terminal of a protective earth Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning d Caution Hot surface Paw Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Earth Ground Class Il Equipment to identify equipment meeting the safety requirements specified for Class Il equipment device protected by double or reinforced insulation Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive devices EU labeling for separate collection of electrical and electronic devices For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the produ
139. d de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transpo
140. d to a compatible R amp S signal generator a controller only needs to talk to the signal generator which in turn takes care of the proper settings for the SGU In the following example the instrument is manually operated via the R amp S SGMA GUI software The R amp S SGU in this example is a base unit equipped with the frequency option R amp S SGU B120 Configuring the the R amp S SGU to upconvert a CW signal generated by the R amp S SGS As a prerequisite for this example the R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on a remote PC LAN Control F R amp S SGMA GUI LAN LAN ILAN Switch e0u8J9jay O o06 onn amp Fig 4 1 Example of a test setup for upconverting a CW signal generated by the R amp S SGS O For higher setting measuring speeds use a PCle switch and a PCle connections 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in figure 4 2 a Connect the R amp S SGS R amp S SGU and the controller to a LAN switch b Connect the RF OUT of the R amp S SGS to the LO IN of the R amp S SGU R amp S SGU as an Extension to the R amp S SGS c Connect the TRIG connectors of the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU d Connect the RF OUT of the R amp S SGU to the RF IN of the signal analyzer 2 Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The POWER ON STANDBY keys have to be green and not blinking 3 Press the ID keys on the front panels of the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU on
141. de in dB default or where 1 dB offset is roughly 12 according to the following Imbalance dB 20log GainQ Gainl 7 4 7 4 1 Pulse Modulation Setting Positive values mean that the Q vector is amplified more than the vector by the corre sponding percentage Negative values have the opposite effect Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment IQRatio on page 156 Quadrature Offset Sets the quadrature offset see chapter 7 3 1 3 Quadrature Offset on page 71 Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe on page 157 Pulse Modulation Setting The R amp S SGU offers pulse modulation using external pulse signals The external pulse signal has to be connected to the mulit purpose TRIG connector Pulse Modulation Settings gt To access the pulse modulation settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Pulse Modulation The Pulse Modulation dialog contains all parameters required to configure pulse modulation and pulse signal generation State Sets the state of the pulse modulator Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM STATe on page 163 Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse modulator signal Normal The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse pause External Local Oscillator Settings Inverse The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse Remote command SOURce lt hw gt PULM POLarity on page 164 7 4 2 Pulse Connector Trigger Setting
142. ded EMI Suppression Electromagnetic interference EMI may affect the measurement results To suppress generated Electromagnetic Interference EMI Use suitable shielded cables of high quality For example use double shielded RF and LAN cables Note USB cables are of varying and often poor quality Therefore check the qual ity of each individual USB cable as described in the service manual Always terminate open cable ends Note the EMC classification in the data sheet Unpacking and Checking the Instrument Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items Check the instrument for any damage If there is damage imme diately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument Make sure not to discard the box and packing material Packing material Retain the original packing material If the instrument needs to be transported or ship ped at a later date you can use the material to protect the control elements and con nectors Putting into Operation 2 1 3 2 1 4 Risk of damage during transportation and shipment Insufficient protection against mechanical and electrostatic effects during transportation and shipment can damage the instrument Always make sure that sufficient mechanical and electrostatic protection is provi ded When shipping an instrument the original packaging should be used If you do not have the original packaging use suff
143. dentification string 14 1 3 2 Syntax for Device Specific Commands instrument CD Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section e DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean e FORMat READings DATA lt type gt lt length gt e HCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean e HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt e HCOPy IMMediate e HCOPy ITEM ALL e HCOPy ITEM LABel lt string gt e HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt e HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait e HCOPy PAGE SCALe numeric value e MMEMory COPY file source gt lt file destination e SENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value e SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric value e GJ ENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value gt lt numeric value gt Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Remote Control Basics Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the man
144. dig bem ht den Sicherheitsstandard unserer Produkte auf dem aktuellsten Stand zu halten und unseren Kunden ein h chstm gliches MaB an Sicherheit zu bieten Unsere Produkte und die daf r erforderlichen Zusatzgerate werden entsprechend der jeweils g ltigen Sicherheitsvorschriften gebaut und gepr ft Die Einhaltung dieser Bestimmungen wird durch unser Qualit tssicherungssystem laufend berwacht Das vorliegende Produkt ist gemaB beiliegender EU Konformitatsbescheinigung gebaut und gepr ft und hat das Werk in sicherheitstechnisch einwandfreiem Zustand verlassen Um diesen Zustand zu erhalten und einen gefahrlosen Betrieb sicherzustellen muss der Benutzer alle Hinweise Warnhinweise und Warnvermerke beachten Bei allen Fragen bez glich vorliegender Sicherheitshinweise steht Ihnen die Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe jederzeit gerne zur Verf gung Dar ber hinaus liegt es in der Verantwortung des Benutzers das Produkt in geeigneter Weise zu verwenden Das Produkt ist ausschlieBlich f r den Betrieb in Industrie und Labor bzw wenn ausdr cklich zugelassen auch f r den Feldeinsatz bestimmt und darf in keiner Weise so verwendet werden dass einer Person Sache Schaden zugef gt werden kann Die Benutzung des Produkts auBerhalb des bestimmungsgem Ben Gebrauchs oder unter Missachtung der Anweisungen des Herstellers liegt in der Verantwortung des Benutzers Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r die Zweckentfremdung des Produkts Die bes
145. ding impairments to the data stream is to simulate frequent sources of distortions in a real signal processing chain in order to generate a test signal with dirty transmitter conditions 7 3 1 1 Gain and Gain Imbalance An I Q gain is a multiplication of all I Q amplitudes by a common factor The effect is equivalent to two identical and Q gain factors The effect of an increased gain factor in the 1 Q constellation diagram is shown below 7 3 1 2 Q Modulation and Signal Impairment Fig 7 1 Effect of an increased amplitude in the I Q constellation diagram An I gain multiplies the amplitudes by a factor leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q gain has the opposite effect Different and Q gain factors result in an I Q imbal ance which is usually due to different gains of the amplifiers in the and Q channels of the I Q modulator The effect of a positive and negative gain imbalance is shown below Q Q Fig 7 2 Negative gain imbalance left and positive right gain imbalance in the I Q constellation dia gram land Q Offset An offset adds a constant value to all amplitudes leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q offset has the opposite effect A combination of and Q values results in an I Q offset which is usually due to carrier feedthrough in the I Q modulator Possi ble reasons are interfering signals at the RF carrier frequency e g an unsuppressed RF carrier subchannel The effect of a positive and Q offset
146. displayed after the start of R amp S SGMA GUI The program always loads the previously used settings so you can continue your work in the next session me ima File Setup Help aaa GHz Ol sGs 100004 Freq 10 000 000 000 000 QW SGU 100014 SGT 1 000 000 000 000 if ver 20 00 som teva 20 0050 E Extension to SGS 100004 ELO E O E Sr Jon mi Qe m NE Jon Jon es User 1 Trigger User 2 Marker 2 GHz 6 1 Operating Menu and Toolbar On the top of the main panel there are the menu bar the tool bar and the info bar with the corresponding Info button Some of the functions are accessible via the toolbar with its icons below the menu selection line The dialogs are built using elements e g selection lists check boxes and entry fields A blue frame indicates that the selected item is active In a highlighted element entries can be made Table 6 1 Content of the operating menu File Setup Help New Instruments About Open Software Contents Save Reset SGMA GUI Index 6 1 1 Operating Menu and Toolbar File Setup Help El Save as Exit Shut down instruments and exit File Menu The R amp S SGMA GUI employs the standard Save Recall file management function and allows you to store and reload settings in to a file with a user defined name and loca tio
147. ditions in the instrument In order to achieve correct adjustment of the instrument make sure that the instrument is warm before performing adjustments The warm up time is 30 minutes The state of this parameter is not affected by an instrument Preset This parameter is influenced only by the Factory Preset SCPI command 8 11 Standby and Restart See chapter 9 3 How to Switch Between the Operating States on page 97 8 12 Diagnostic and Tests This section describes the settings provided for diagnostic and test purposes 8 12 1 Keyboard Tests gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Diagnostic Tests gt Keyboard Test Diagnostic and Tests Use this function to check the proper operation of all front panel elements If Keyboard Test is enabled all front panel LEDs except the POWER ON are orange The exact test procedure is described in the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument SCPI command TEST KEYBoard STATe on page 177 How to Generate I Q Signals with an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Upconverter 9 Performing Configuration Tasks This section provides a general explanation on how to operate the instrument manually via the R amp S SGMA GUI software We assume that the R amp S SGU is connected to a remote PC The R amp S SGMA GUI software has to be installed on this remote PC and the instrument has to be added to the list of Available Instruments
148. e Access Note The two functions Exclusive Access and monitoring are mutually exclusive 4 Send remote control commands from the controller to the instrument open the cor responding dialogs in the R amp S SGMA GUI and observe the status of the parame ters Programming Examples 11 Remote Control Commands In the following all remote control commands will be presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of the numerical values 11 1 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S SGU follow the SCPI syntax rules Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overl
149. e amount of the searched instruments and to speed up the scan process select Configure Instruments gt Scan LAN instruments with hostname prefix and enter the prefix the searched hostnames begin with The scan function searches only for instruments whose hostnames begin with the selected prefix All instruments which are connected to one of the available interfaces are Switched on and are not locked are displayed in the Available Instruments list The R amp S SGMA GUI obtains all information for connecting to the instrument so further configuration is not necessary How to Activate Instruments for Control from the R amp S SGMA GUI In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Available Instruments in the Configure Instruments dialog lists all instruments configured in the software Select the newly configured connected or deactivated instrument and set Active gt On to activate it Tip Only active instruments are displayed in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel How to Edit Instruments In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments The Configure Instruments dialog opens and lists the Available Instruments Select the instrument to be edited and click the Edit button The Edit Instrument dialog opens Change the settings and confirm with OK The edited settings are applied How to Delete an Instrument In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select Setup gt Instruments
150. e case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard pos sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru ments connected to the controller Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types of commands e The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem
151. e celui ci est d plac d un environnement froid dans un environnement chaud L infiltration d eau augmente le risque de choc lectrique Avant le nettoyage d brancher le produit de l alimentation par exemple r seau lectrique ou batterie Pour le nettoyage des appareils utiliser un chiffon doux non pelucheux N utiliser en aucun cas de produit de nettoyage chimique tel que de l alcool de l ac tone ou un diluant nitrocellulosique Fonctionnement 1 L utilisation du produit exige une formation sp cifique ainsi qu une grande concentration Il est imp ratif que les personnes qui utilisent le produit pr sent les aptitudes physiques mentales et psychiques requises vu qu autrement des dommages corporels ou mat riels ne peuvent pas tre exclus Le choix du personnel qualifi pour l utilisation du produit est sous la responsabilit de l employeur l exploitant Avant de d placer ou de transporter le produit lire et respecter la section Transport Comme pour tous les biens produits de fagon industrielle l utilisation de mat riaux pouvant causer des allergies allerg nes comme par exemple le nickel ne peut tre totalement exclue Si lors de l utilisation de produits Rohde amp Schwarz des r actions allergiques surviennent telles qu ruption cutan e ternuements fr quents rougeur de la conjonctive ou difficult s respiratoires il faut imm diatement consulter un m decin pour en clarifier la cause et viter
152. e connection between the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU is establihed and the instruments can be used Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 10 Network and Remote Control Operation As an alternative to operating the R amp S SGU interactively via the R amp S SGMA GUI one can also controll the R amp S SGU using programmed commands from a remote PC The description in this section requires basic knowledge of the remote control opera tion Definitions specified in the SCPI standard are not provided Nevertheless you will find some basic information to the SCPI syntax command lists and general programming recommendations in chapter 14 1 Remote Control Basics on page 188 In addition this chapter provides information on the status reporting sys tem of the instrument 10 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols The instrument supports several interfaces for remote control The following table gives an overview Table 10 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols VISA address string and Library Remarks Local Area HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol A LAN connector is located on the Network IVI 6 1 rear panel of the instrument TOPIP SR SShislipOlss LAN nn The interface is based on TCP IP and e VXI 11 supports various protocols TCPIP host address inst0 INSTR For details see chapter 10 1 2 LAN Library VISA Interface on page 106 e socket communication Raw Ethe
153. e das Produkt im Fahrzeug ausreichend ab um im Falle eines Unfalls Verletzungen oder Sch den anderer Art zu verhindern Entsorgung 1 Batterien bzw Akkumulatoren die nicht mit dem Hausm ll entsorgt werden d rfen darf nach Ende der Lebensdauer nur ber eine geeignete Sammelstelle oder eine Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle entsorgt werden Am Ende der Lebensdauer des Produktes darf dieses Produkt nicht ber den normalen Hausm ll entsorgt werden sondern muss getrennt gesammelt werden Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ein Entsorgungskonzept entwickelt und bernimmt die Pflichten der R cknahme und Entsorgung f r Hersteller innerhalb der EU in vollem Umfang Wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre Rohde amp Schwarz Kundendienststelle um das Produkt umweltgerecht zu entsorgen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 7 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise 3 Werden Produkte oder ihre Bestandteile ber den bestimmungsgem en Betrieb hinaus mechanisch und oder thermisch bearbeitet k nnen ggf gef hrliche Stoffe schwermetallhaltiger Staub wie z B Blei Beryllium Nickel freigesetzt werden Die Zerlegung des Produkts darf daher nur von speziell geschultem Fachpersonal erfolgen Unsachgem fes Zerlegen kann Gesundheitsschaden hervorrufen Die nationalen Vorschriften zur Entsorgung sind zu beachten 4 Falls beim Umgang mit dem Produkt Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffe entstehen die speziell zu entsorgen sind z B regelm Big zu wechselnde K h
154. e number of a sub instrument e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional The IP address host address computer name is used by the programs to identify and control the instrument It is automatically assigned by the DHCP server the first time the device is registered on the network Alternatively you can also assign its LAN device name You can find the IP address in the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote dialog and also adjust it manually if required See below the characteristics of the VISA resource strings for the corresponding inter face protocols The highlighted characters are crucial HiSLIP TCPIP host address hislipO INSTR hislip0 HiSLIP device name designates that the interface protocol HiSLIP is used mandatory hislipO is composed of HiSLIP device name HiSLIP port and must be assigned For details of the HiSLIP protocol refer to chapter 10 1 2 2 HiSLIP Protocol on page 108 VXI 11 TCPIP host address instO INSTR e inst0 LAN device name indicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used optional Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols instO currently selects the VXI 11 protocol by default and can be omitted For details of the VXI 11 protocol refer to chapter 10 1 2 3 VXI 11 Protocol on page 109 Socket Communication TCPIP host address port SOCKET port determines the used port number e SOCKET indicates the raw network socket res
155. e on page 156 PEP Displays the Peak Envelope Power PEP of the RF signal of the selected instrument The value is calculated as follows PEP Level Crest Factor Remote command SOURce POWer PEP on page 162 Level Sets the RF level at the RF output connector of the selected instrument If you set a level offset it will be indicated in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel by a change in the name of this parameter from Level to Level Offset Working with R amp S SGMA GUI Level 30 00 dBm gt Gas 30 10 jam gt Note The SCPI command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display that means the level containing off set while SOURce POWer POWer sets the level at the RF output connector Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude on page 161 SOURce POWer POWer on page 163 6 4 Working with R8S SGMA GUI This section explains how to work with the R amp S SGMA GUI software and perform con figuration tasks for manual operation of the instruments 6 4 1 Storing and Loading Settings In order to proceed work with a particular configuration of the instruments in the R8S SGMA GUI it is useful to save the used settings and load them again later How to store and load settings 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt File gt Save As 2 Navigate to the desired directory and enter the file name The extension
156. e other commands are executed Command synchronization using WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped com mand is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Setbit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Send the overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Sendthe overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished Remote Control Basics OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 P
157. ea ie 26 Level RE OUELDUE ee een a 57 67 Level lint oon a 68 Level offset Level range RESQU PUE u a 68 Licence for software option nennen 82 LINUX ae 19 LO Go n n e o HP 28 LO IN Key 26 Load instrument settings m Loaded Modules icono teri iin 82 Local oscillator FREQUENCY ein eins 76 El 76 Local Oscillator COMME i o 2 2 E RT 26 Lost LAN connection to an instrument 89 M Maintenance ferocem M 87 OPERATION P A M 86 Malfunctions POACHING nn nina 208 MAX 194 MESSAGE pe 53 Additional information 64 AIDIMESSAQES tnr em erret ea 64 zi 64 A een 64 Deletingiall ttt mrt 64 D l tingibri f ei rrr entretenir inert trenes 64 Displaying 64 Error ias 64 Message level ee 53 Messages COMMANAS sisstin crecer o keinen 188 Instrument 188 Instrument responses 189 Interface cir ob aaa 188 MIMO CONNECTION RU TTE 28 MIN T Mnemonics Ves OPTOMA nn 191 Mode RE deve zo mite nennen Ae 66 TRIG connector iw Mode IP address retener eee te Cen 88 Monitoring COMISIONS PES 120 Same remote channel ssssssssses 120 N NAN 194 Network Setting S cose nico reor tetto ias 87 New instrument SCAN E
158. ectric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution degree 2 2 Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent
159. ed at the connector Remote command CONNector TRIGger OMODe on page 141 T 7 Preset Calls up a defined instrument setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that concern the inte gration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed Overview of the most important preset states The following list gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator set tings The other presets can be found in the information accompanying the remote commands e RF frequency 1 GHz RF output switched off e Modulator State Off Settings that are not affected by the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Preset func tion Power on settings Level dialog e Network settings Setup dialog e Password and settings protected by passwords Setup dialog Preset To preset the R amp S SGMA GUI itself and all configured instruments to their predefined state use the SGMA GUI gt File gt New function SCPI command SYSTem PRESet on page 135 Hardware Configuration 8 General Instrument Settings and Instrument Setup This section describes the settings which do not directly affect signal generation gt To access these settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup and select the required dialog Diagnostic
160. ed at the beginning of the file name If possible special characters should not be used The use of the slashes and should be avoided since they are used in file paths A number of names are reserved for the operating system e g CLOCKS CON AUX COM1 COMA LPT1 LPT3 NUL and PRN In the R amp S SGU all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a characteristic extension The extension is separated from the actual file name by a dot see chap ter 11 10 2 Extensions for User Files on page 145 for an overview of the file types The two characters and function as wildcards meaning they are used for selecting several files The character represents exactly one character while the character represents all characters up to the end of the file name therefore stands for all files in a directory When used in conjunction with the commands the parameter ile name is speci fied as a string parameter with quotation marks It can contain either the complete path including the drive only the path and the file name or only the file name The file name must include the file extension The same applies for the parameters directory name and path Depending on how much information is provided either the values specified in the parameter or the values specified with the command MMEM CDIR default directory are used for the path and the drive settings in the commands Before the in
161. ed off It is recom mended that you use the SGMA GUI gt Instrument gt Preset function to return the instrument to its defined preset state every time a new configuration is required or the current setup is no longer relevant The R amp S SGU offers a two stage preset concept e Preset the instrument to a predefined state The SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Preset function calls up a defined instru ment setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed Preset the instrument to its factory settings Linux Operating System The instrument can also be forced to load its default factory settings To access the corresponding dialog box select the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Factory Preset function For more information and an overview of the settings affected by the factory preset function see chapter 8 9 Factory Preset on page 90 User defined instrument states can be stored and called up using the functions SGMA GUI gt File gt Save As Open 2 2 Linux Operating System The instrument uses an embedded Linux operating system optimally adapted to the instrument Accessing the Operating System No access to the operating system is required for normal
162. ed via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN e INF NINF Remote Control Basics INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses e NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a instru ment response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Example Setting command SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Query SENS LIST FREQ Response 3 5E9 Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered follow ing the quotation mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics i e they can be entered using a short or long f
163. eisen des Herstellers Bei Installation abweichend von der Produktdokumentation k nnen Personen verletzt unter Umst nden sogar get tet werden Stellen Sie das Produkt nicht auf hitzeerzeugende Ger tschaften z B Radiatoren und Heizl fter Die Umgebungstemperatur darf nicht die in der Produktdokumentation oder im Datenblatt spezifizierte Maximaltemperatur berschreiten Eine berhitzung des Produkts kann elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 3 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Elektrische Sicherheit Werden die Hinweise zur elektrischen Sicherheit nicht oder unzureichend beachtet kann dies elektrischen Schlag Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen 1 Vor jedem Einschalten des Produkts ist sicherzustellen dass die am Produkt eingestellte Nennspannung und die Netznennspannung des Versorgungsnetzes bereinstimmen Ist es erforderlich die Spannungseinstellung zu ndern so muss ggf auch die dazu geh rige Netzsicherung des Produkts ge ndert werden Bei Produkten der Schutzklasse mit beweglicher Netzzuleitung und Ger testeckvorrichtung ist der Betrieb nur an Steckdosen mit Schutzkontakt und angeschlossenem Schutzleiter zul ssig Jegliche absichtliche Unterbrechung des Schutzleiters sowohl in der Zuleitung als auch am Produkt selbst ist unzulassig Es kann d
164. ektrolyten z B Lithiumzellen muss der EN 62133 entsprechen 1 Zellen d rfen nicht zerlegt ge ffnet oder zerkleinert werden 2 Zellen oder Batterien d rfen weder Hitze noch Feuer ausgesetzt werden Die Lagerung im direkten Sonnenlicht ist zu vermeiden Zellen und Batterien sauber und trocken halten Verschmutzte Anschl sse mit einem trockenen sauberen Tuch reinigen 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 6 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Zellen oder Batterien d rfen nicht kurzgeschlossen werden Zellen oder Batterien d rfen nicht gefahrbringend in einer Schachtel oder in einem Schubfach gelagert werden wo sie sich gegenseitig kurzschlieBen oder durch andere leitende Werkstoffe kurzgeschlossen werden k nnen Eine Zelle oder Batterie darf erst aus ihrer Originalverpackung entnommen werden wenn sie verwendet werden soll Zellen oder Batterien d rfen keinen unzul ssig starken mechanischen St Ben ausgesetzt werden Bei Undichtheit einer Zelle darf die Fl ssigkeit nicht mit der Haut in Ber hrung kommen oder in die Augen gelangen Falls es zu einer Ber hrung gekommen ist den betroffenen Bereich mit reichlich Wasser waschen und rztliche Hilfe in Anspruch nehmen Werden Zellen oder Batterien die alkalische Elektrolyte enthalten z B Lithiumzellen unsachgemaB ausgewechselt oder geladen besteht Explosionsgefahr Zellen oder Batterien nur durch den ent sprechenden R amp S Typ ersetzen siehe Ersatzteilliste um die Sicherheit de
165. em is established An external analog signal is provided at the and Q connectors of the instrument LEE EEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2020202 Reset the instrument first ck ck ck ck ck 0k EEE EEE 0k 0k 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 RST CLS ck ck ck ck ck ck EEE EEE 0k 0k 0k 00k 000000000000 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 Lock the instrument to the controller EEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 LOCK 12345 Lock the instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Programming Examples Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused CKCKCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck KKK KKK KK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Set RF frequency and level KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ke ck Sk kk ko A KARA SOURce FREQuency CW 2 GHz SOURce POWer 10dBm SOURCe POWer PEP KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Define and enable impairments Enable modulation
166. ement correspondant Conservez les consignes de s curit fondamentales et la documentation produit dans un lieu s r et transmettez ces documents aux autres utilisateurs du produit La stricte observation des consignes de s curit a pour but d exclure des blessures ou dommages caus s par des dangers de toutes sortes A cet effet il est n cessaire de lire avec soin et de bien comprendre les consignes de s curit ci dessous avant l utilisation du produit et de les respecter lors de l utilisation du produit Toutes les autres consignes de s curit pr sent es l emplacement correspondant de la documentation produit par exemple celles concernant la protection des personnes doivent galement tre imp rativement respect es Dans les pr sentes consignes de s curit toutes les marchandises commercialis es par le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz notamment les appareils les syst mes ainsi que les accessoires sont d nomm s produit 1171 0000 43 08 Page 1 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Symboles et marquages de s curit Signification Symbole Signification Avis source g n rale de danger Se r f rer la documentation produit MARCHE ARRET tension d alimentation Attention lors de la manipulation d appareils ayant un poids lev Indicateur de veille Risque de choc lectrique Courant continu CC Avertissement surface chaude Courant alternatif CA B
167. emote command INSTruments COUNt on page 179 INSTruments NAME on page 180 INSTruments TYPE on page 181 INSTruments ACTive STATe on page 179 Scan Triggers a scan function and searches for instruments connected to the remote com puter via all of the available interfaces During the scan process a progress bar is dis played Tip The first initialization of a newly connected instrument in a network and the instru ment s request to the DHCP server for an IP address may take some time During this time the instrument does not respond to the query sent by the scan function If the instrument does not appear in the list of Available Instruments trigger the scan func tion again after some minutes Remote command INSTruments SCAN on page 180 New Instrument Calls the Add Edit Instruments dialog Delete Instrument Removes the selected instrument from the list of Available Instruments Edit Instrument Calls the Add Edit Instruments dialog Clear Instrument Removes all instruments from the list of Available Instruments Export Opens the standard file save browser for saving the list of the available instruments in a mapping file The mapping files have the file extension map so the file name typed in is automatically equipped with this extension A mapping file provides a cross reference between the instruments symbolic names and their respective remote control parameters The information in the mapping file is
168. enerator We assume that a remote PC controller is connected to both the R amp S SGU and the sig nal generator local oscillator When changing any parameters which affect the output signal of the combined system of local oscillator and R amp S SGU the controller has to follow these steps Setting the signal of the R amp S SGU 1 Set the parameters of the R amp S SGU like frequency and level as needed SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem 2 Query the local oscillator frequency and the local oscillator level from R amp S SGU with the SCPI commands SOURce LOSCillator FREQuency and SOURce LOSCillator POWer 3 Interpret the result and apply the required changes to the LO 4 Send the SCPI command SOURce SETTings APPLy IMMediate to R amp S SGU to output the signal See chapter 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Performance on page 126 for an example ESOUREEFEOSCIAISEFREQUENEY anni rare a ar 159 SOURCE LOS GillatomnPOW GI en 159 SOURce LOSCillator FREQuency Queries the frequency of the local oscillator input signal See chapter 11 14 SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem on page 158 for a descrip tion of the setting process Return values lt Frequency gt float Range 1E 6 to 20E 9 Increment 1E 3 RST 1E 9 Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency on page 76 SOURce LOSCillator POWer Queries the level of the local oscillator input signal See ch
169. ent setup are not changed e g TCP IP address or remote operating mode e Activation of the original state of delivery factory reset SYSTem FPReset on page 136 Only functions that are protected by a password remain unchanged as well as the passwords themselves SOURce lt hw gt PRESet SYSTem PRESet Triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as e the RST command e the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Preset function For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function see chapter 7 7 Pre set on page 77 CALibration Subsystem Example SYST PRES All instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to their default values Usage Setting only SYSTem FPReset The command triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery Only func tions that are protected by a password remain unchanged The factory preset function resets nearly all instrument settings In addition to the regu lar preset a Factory Preset resets also the following values e Power on settings Level dialog Network settings including hostname Setup Network Setting dialog e Remote Channel settings Setup gt Remote Channel dialog For an overview of the settings affected by the factory preset function see chapter 8 9 Factory Preset on page 90 Example SYST FPR all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to the factory values
170. entSocketDescr receiveBuffer receiveBufferSize 0 if receivedByteCount lt 0 throw string error while receiving data n rxString string receiveBuffer receiving receivedByteCount receiveBufferSize delete receiveBuffer string TcpClient getCurrentHostName const return currentHostName int TcpClient getCurrentPort const return currentPort TelnetClient cpp include iostream include TcpClient h void printUsage cout usage EthernetRawCommand lt server ip gt scpi command endl int main int argc char argv int errorCode 0 no error Telnet program examples bool useSingleCommand false string singleCommand string hostname int port string input TcpClient client switch argc case 3 useSingleCommand true singleCommand argv 2 case 2 hostname argv 1 break default printUsage return 1 try client connectToServer hostname port bool terminate false while terminate char buffer 1024 if useSingleCommand input singleCommand send string else cin getline buffer 1024 input buffer if input end terminate true if terminate client transmit input send string int qPos input find 0 receive string only when needed ifi dos gt 0 string rcStr client receive rcStr cout rcStr e
171. equipped with an older firmware version a firmware update prior to enabling the software option may be required The information on the valid firmware versions for the purchased software option is provided together with the option Refer to chapter 9 5 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instru ment on page 100 for information on how to perform firmware update and to chap ter 9 6 How to Activate Options on page 101 for instruction on how to install new options The firmware update is also described in the service manual chapter 4 on CD ROM supplied with the instrument 8 4 8 5 Protection Protection The Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of protected service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only Unlocking of Protected Service Functions 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Protection The Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of protected service func tions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only 2 To deactivate the protection the correct password has to be entered After the instrument has been switched on the protection levels 1 to 4 are automatically activated Enter Protection Level 1 gt Password gt 123456 Protection Level 1 is activated Protection Level 4 A On Password Protection Level Password Protection Level 1 can be activated to expand the fu
172. er 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 126 Usage Query only SOURce PULM Subsystem Manual operation See PEP on page 57 SOURce POWer POWer lt Power gt Sets the level at the RF output connector This value does not consider a specified offset The command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet sets the level of the Level display that means the level containing offset Parameters Power float Range 120 to 25 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example POW POW 15 sets the RF level at output to 15 dBm Manual operation See Level on page 57 SOURce POWer RANGe LOWer SOURce POWer RANGe UPPer Queries the minimum maximum level range in the current level mode Return values lt Upper gt float Range 300 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 30 Usage Query only Manual operation See Level Range on page 68 11 16 SOURce PULM Subsystem LSOURCe hw PULNESTA TG aa ea ne 163 SOURce lt hw P ULMIPOLAN Yu eterne ea eine 164 SOURce lt hw gt PULM STATe State Activates the pulse modulation Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example PULM STAT ON activates pulse modulation STATUS Subsystem Manual operation See State on page 74 SOURce lt hw gt PULM POLarity lt Polarity gt Sets the polarity of the pulse modulator signal This command is effective only for an external modulation signal
173. eration See Crest Factor on page 72 SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem R amp S SGU as an extension to a compatible R amp S signal generator If a R amp S SGU is connected to a compatible R amp S signal generator the R amp S SGU acts as an extension to the signal generator extending its frequency range In this setup a controller does not need to access the R amp S SGU directly Instead the signal generator acts as a controller to the R amp S SGU and depending on the required output signal parameters performs all required settings automatically For example if the signal generator is set to an output frequency of 15 GHz it passes this value on to the R amp S SGU On reception of the new frequency R amp S SGU blanks its output and computes the necessary settings for the local oscillator signal generator Next the signal generator queries R amp S SGU for the required frequency and level val ues of the local oscillator which answers with for example 7 5 GHz and 10 dBm The signal generator applies these settings to its own oscillator hardware and confirms that the required signal is now present at its output connector by sending the apply com mand to the R amp S SGU The R amp S SGU unblanks its own output thus finishing the cycle R amp S SGU as an upconverter for any signal generator If on the other hand the R amp S SGU is connected to an incompatible signal generator the controller has to perform the above steps instead of the signal g
174. es dommages cologiques Pour plus d informations concernant la protection de l environnement voir la page d accueil de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 43 08 Page 8 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 65 65 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 2 1 7 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 4
175. essary clean the fans regularly to ensure they operate properly at all times If the instrument is run with obstructed fans for a longer period it may become overheated which may cause damage 12 2 Storing and Packing The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet If the instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time it must be protected against dust Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping The two protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from being damaged The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging to occur If you do not use the original packaging use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and provide for sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from slipping inside the package Wrap antistatic packing foil around the instrument to protect it from electro static charging 12 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 Status Information Error Messages and Troubleshooting This chapter describes the error messages of the R amp S SGU The error messages are output in the Info line on the screen and entered in the error event queue of the sta tus reporting system A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warn ings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen Some error mes sages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument
176. ets et assume toutes les obligations en mati re de reprise et d limination valables pour les fabricants au sein de l UE Veuillez vous adresser votre centre de service apr s vente Rohde amp Schwarz pour liminer le produit de mani re cologique 3 Siles produits ou leurs composants sont travaill s m caniquement et ou thermiquement au del de l utilisation pr vue ils peuvent le cas ch ant lib rer des substances dangereuses poussi res contenant des m taux lourds comme par exemple du plomb du b ryllium ou du nickel Le d montage du produit ne doit donc tre effectu que par un personnel qualifi et sp cialement form Le d montage inad quat peut nuire la sant Les r gles nationales concernant l limination des d chets doivent tre observ es 4 Si lors de l utilisation du produit des substances dangereuses ou combustibles exigeant une limination sp ciale sont d gag es comme par exemple liquides de refroidissement ou huiles moteurs qui sont changer r guli rement les consignes de s curit du fabricant de ces substances dangereuses ou combustibles ainsi que les r gles sur l limination en vigueur au niveau r gional doivent tre respect es Les consignes de s curit sp ciales correspondantes dans la documentation produit doivent galement tre respect es le cas ch ant L limination non conforme des substances dangereuses ou combustibles peut provoquer des atteintes la sant et d
177. etting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed USB Device Security Settings Enable disable the USB interface Note The instrument does not recognize any device connected to the USB interface when the interface is disabled LAN Connection Security Settings Enable disable the LAN interface 8 6 Maintenance Note It is not possible to access the instrument via LAN while the LAN connection is disabled An enabled LAN Connection is a prerequisite for the remote control of the instrument via VNC FTP or SAMBA Security Password Security Settings Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a security password The default is 123456 Note It is highly recommended to change the default security password before con necting the instrument to the network To change the security password select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Security gt Change Security Password The settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Security Settings Accept a new entry or selection and change the settings accordingly Maintenance The R amp S SGU provides a special dialog for performing some maintenance procedures like installing firmware packages gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Mainte nance Install firmware package None
178. etwork Security Setting User Name Change User Password Indicates the user name used for access to the Linux operating system and valid for VNC FTP and SAMBA access Old Password Change User Password Enter the currently used user password The default password is instrument New Password Change User Password Enter the new user password Confirm Password Change User Password Enter the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Change Password Change User Password Changes the password accordingly Change Security Password Note It is highly recommended to change the default security password before con necting the instrument to the network The security password is for exampe required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface Old Password Change Security Password Enter the currently used security password The default password is 123456 New Password Change Security Password Enter the new security password The security password may contain decimal charac ters only Confirm Password Change Security Password Enter the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Change Password Change Security Password Changes the password accordingly Security Settings Comprises the settings for enabling and disabling the USB and LAN interfaces The s
179. f these settings had been configured to values different to the default ones The factory preset function resets nearly all instrument settings In addition to the regu lar preset a Factory Preset resets also the following values e Power on settings Level dialog e Network settings including hostname Setup gt Network Setting dialog e Remote Channel settings Setup gt Remote Channel dialog Eco Mode state Setup gt Eco Mode dialog To maintain security password settings and all settings protected by these passwords like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed Not affected by the Factory Preset are also user data lists or instrument settings files created for example by means of the File Save As function Remote command SYSTem FPReset on page 136 8 10 Eco Mode This energy saving mode is available only for instruments equipped with optionR amp S SGU B140 B140V gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Eco Mode Standby and Restart With enabled Eco Mode 1 the doubler stage in a 40 GHz instrument is perma nently switched off to reduce power consumption and the maximum frequency is limited to 20 GHZ An enabled Eco Mode is indicated by a green coloring of the frequency range in the R amp S SGMA GUI ea NOTICE Risk of invalid adjustment after changing the Eco Mode The switching off and on of the doubler stage changes the thermal con
180. faces LAN USB or PCle Controller Fig 5 2 Configuration example remote control from a controller For information about remote control refer to chapter 10 Network and Remote Control Operation on page 103 chapter 14 1 Remote Control Basics on page 188 5 1 3 Control of an R amp S SGU from a compatible R amp S Signal Generator If an R amp S SGU is connected to a compatible R amp S Signal Generator e g R amp S SGS it extends its frequency range In this setup a controller does not need to access the R amp S SGU directly Instead the compatible R amp S Signal Generator acts as a controller to the R amp S SGU The generator performs all required settings automatically depending on the required output signal parameters The figure 5 3 shows a configuration example of the R amp S SGU directly controlled by an R amp S SGS For a detailed description of the connecting possibilities refer to chap ter 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 38 LAN nombeascuwanz SOMA M SOURCE ii m Application Program f gt mimm B US R amp S SGS Control Control R amp S SGU Fig 5 3 Configuration example the R amp S SGU as an extension to the R amp S SGS 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU If an R amp S SGU is connected to an R amp S SGS the R amp S SGU acts as an extension to the R
181. fety instructions also contain information on operating condi tions that will prevent damage to the instrument The instrument s data sheet may con tain additional operating conditions Risk of electrostatic discharge ESD Electrostatic discharge ESD can cause damage to the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test DUT ESD is most likely to occur when you con nect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument s test ports To prevent ESD use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination For details refer to the safety instructions delivered in electronic format on the docu mentation CD ROM Putting into Operation 2 1 1 2 1 2 Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloa
182. g device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 3 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 or IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any par
183. ge 2 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Mots d alerte et significations Les mots d alerte suivants sont utilis s dans la documentation produit pour avertir des risques et dangers DANGER Indique une situation dangereuse imm diate qui si elle n est pas vit e comporte un risque lev de blessures graves ou mortelles Indique une situation dangereuse possible qui si elle n est pas vit e comporte un risque mod r de blessures graves ou mortelles comporte un risque faible de blessures mineures ou mod r es Indique la possibilit d une fausse man uvre susceptible d endommager le produit A ATTENTION Indique une situation dangereuse qui si elle n est pas vit e Ces mots d alerte correspondent la d finition habituelle utilis e pour des applications civiles dans l espace conomique europ en Des d finitions divergentes peuvent cependant exister dans d autres espaces conomiques ou dans le cadre d applications militaires Il faut donc veiller ce que les mots d alerte d crits ici ne soient utilis s qu en relation avec la documentation produit correspondante et seulement avec le produit correspondant L utilisation des mots d alerte en relation avec des produits ou des documentations non correspondants peut conduire des erreurs d interpr tation et par cons quent des dommages corporels ou mat riels tats et positions de fonctionnement L appareil ne doit tre utilis que da
184. gt PROTection CLEar iSOURce shws PRESSl inire e cete eta e a seine nee n EO EO d cer ERR ee IE E STATus OPER tlon CONDILEOD citeriore an STATus OPERation ENABle STATUS OP RAUONNTRANSIIONME cs oni ers tarro esi na seras st amet ra a teen ne da io etre STATUS OPERAUONP TRAnsitioni 2 prater rece aaa ea de STATus OPERation EVENIJ 5 5 entrer trt rne ces STATUS PRESO e STATus QUEStionable CONDON custodia sem cet ette a ctp trao Pe td iSTATus QUEStIonable ENABIG iri inre rione Eco nee minime Sera x ve tr peor eae ev Rd es STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus QUEStionable EVENIC 5 2 rrr terrre rr reet rr Dh ere era ne dre b nce e P ER ins STATUS QUEUS agrc 167 SYSTem COoMMunicate HISEip RESOUFCGT onere trn tret rr eene ter rn tn nee re 173 iSYSTem cCoMMunicate NE TWork BPABQLr esS ii ioci er rtr cope aid 171 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE iii 171 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress ii 172 iSYSTem CoMMunicate NE TWOrKRESOUICG een ii at 173 YStem coMMunicate NE TWorleRES Taft ote enit tori ipae tapes inei aps ako eu ARESE 172 SYSTrem coMMunicate NE TWOrk S TATUS irte rtp terere ecc eee ep uer cec edu 172 SYSTem COMMun
185. guli rement quant leur tat de s curit technique Si le produit n est pas dot d un interrupteur d alimentation pour le couper du r seau lectrique ou si l interrupteur d alimentation disponible n est pas appropri pour couper le produit du r seau lectrique le connecteur m le du c ble de raccordement est consid rer comme dispositif de s paration Le dispositif de s paration doit tre tout moment facilement accessible Si par exemple le connecteur d alimentation sert de dispositif de s paration la longueur du c ble de raccordement ne doit pas d passer 3 m Les commutateurs fonctionnels ou lectroniques ne sont pas appropri s pour couper l appareil du r seau lectrique Si des produits sans interrupteur d alimentation sont int gr s dans des b tis ou syst mes le dispositif de s paration doit tre report au niveau du syst me Ne jamais utiliser le produit si le c ble d alimentation est endommag V rifier r guli rement le parfait tat du c ble d alimentation Prendre les mesures pr ventives appropri es et opter pour des types de pose tels que le c ble d alimentation ne puisse pas tre endommag et que personne ne puisse subir de pr judice par exemple en tr buchant sur le c ble ou par des chocs lectriques L utilisation des produits est uniquement autoris e sur des r seaux d alimentation de type TN TT prot g s par des fusibles d une intensit max de 16 A pour toute intensit sup rieu
186. he default hostname of the instrument is a non case sensitive string built as follows hostname instrument name gt lt serial number where lt serial number gt is the individual serial number of the instrument lt instrument name gt is the complete name of the instrument written without spaces How to query the hostname of the instrument 1 Find the individual serial number on rear of the instrument e g 100021 2 Build the default hostname For the R amp S SGU with serial number 100021 the default hostname is rssgul00a100021 Working with R amp S SGMA GUI For instructions on how to change the default hostname refer to chapter 9 4 How to Use Computer Names on page 99 6 4 4 Bidirectional Instrument Identification In practice instruments are integrated into a large network or placed in racks together with several other instruments of the same kind It might be difficult then to find out which of the instruments configured in the R amp S SGMA GUI corresponds to which physical instrument or to localize all instruments operated by the current controller The R amp S SGMA GUI and the instrument provide the Device Identification function for this purpose How to find an instrument in the R amp S SGMA GUI gt If several instruments have been configured and activated in the R amp S SGMA GUI press the ID button on the instruments front panel to trigger device identification The Edit Instrument dialog of this instr
187. he steps as described in chapter 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 38 Using an USB Adapter You can use an USB adapter to customize the connectors of an USB cable to the requirements of the instrument For example you can use a Type A Micro A adapter to customize a standard USB cable with Type A and Type Micro B connectors for the connection of an R amp S SGS acting as a host to an R amp S SGU acting as an USB device In some cases you can also use a Type A Micro B adapter to establish a connection to the instrument To check whether the adapter you have is suitable or not you can connect an USB stick with an LED through the adapter to the instrument If the LED of the USB stick lights up after a connection to the instrument then you can use this adapter for further applications with the instrument Front Panel Tour 3 Instrument Tour The following topics will help you get familiar with the instrument and perform the first steps Front Panel Tour e Rear Panel Tour This section explains the control elements and the connectors of the R amp S SGU with the aid of the front and rear views Specifications of interfaces can be found in the data sheet 3 1 Front Panel Tour This section provides an overview of control elements on the front panel of the R amp S SGU The connectors of the R amp S SGU are placed on the rear panel and are described in chapter 3 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 27 A
188. his documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Putting into Operation 2 Preparing for Use Puting OOPS ANON ica A Rat n 13 e Linux Operating Systemische 19 e Connecting an External PC and Devices 19 2 1 Putting into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R amp S SGU for the first time Risk of injury and instrument damage The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock fire personal injury or damage e Do not open the instrument casing e Read and observe the Basic Safety Instructions at the beginning of this manual or on the documentation CD ROM in addition to the safety instructions in the follow ing sections Notice that the data sheet may specify additional operating condi tions Risk of instrument damage Note that the general sa
189. ible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 08 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde amp Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m Sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 96 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 96 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 ndice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En
190. icate NETWork COMMon HOSTname SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway sess enne SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK conan ccancnanccnnnccnno 173 SYSTem COMMunicate PClexpress RESOUrCe 1 rnit aa tente ec 174 SYSTem COMMunicate SERIal BAUD u een neo 175 SYSTem COMMunicate SERIalPARIty rotten erre tenerte ern de aan 175 iSYSTem cCoMMunicat SERIal RESQUICO Pucci repe Ee i trice ede Er FOROR E ELE Ee ERE E EN etui 174 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs m YSrem coMMunicate SOCKetRESOUfGCe ot respete ppc e deett pore rad 174 iSYSTem cCoMMunicate USB RESOUECO itt et eri ere ann EE a ya Eme deua res 174 SN RS Ely 100 1 CO OPE 168 POY ST em ERROT ALU uu A acti 169 SYS Tem ERRO CODE AL Fin une san ko EO ape er o ro bar ca DR na ve EVE OY LER ete 169 SNS TemERRoOrCODELNE TP ea ce etes dat 169 SYSTem ERRor COUNt SYSTEM ERRO NEXT ouvir ce corsa Ere MI Ate eese ee Ever et Ine ce Yan ee Meal 170 SX onem b PRESSE A one sce ca even ELEM teens A EE E AE 136 SYSTem MMEMONPATEH USER iet erret tren eet pr dere Pen n epar da kae E REX RN XR do EF ERROR 175 IS TEM OSM EE DES 176 A EET EOD 135 YSTemiPROTectschs STATE u ee a 176 OYO TEM SERRO Eat EIS 171 SYS lem STARUP COMPILE ornoa e E EEE scenes AEE AEN ETE TEONA 176 SYS kem VERSION vrai asi n ee ere eee E A N E 171 TES
191. icient padding to prevent the instrument from moving around inside the box Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging e Secure the instrument to prevent any movement and other mechanical effects dur ing transportation The carrying handles at the front and side of the casing are designed to lift or carry the instrument Do not apply an excessive external force to the handles Observe the information on transporting heavy instruments in the basic safety instruc tions included at the front of the printed manual and on the supplied CD ROM Accessory List The instrument comes with the following accessories Power cable e Getting Started printed manual e R amp S SGU User Documentation CD Rom Placing or Mounting the Instrument The R amp S SGU is designed for use under laboratory conditions either on a bench top or in a rack using a rack adapter kit order number see data sheet Bench Top Operation If the R amp S SGU is operated on a bench top the surface should be flat The instrument can be used in horizontal position standing on its feet Putting into Operation Risk of injury and instrument damage if stacking instruments A stack of instruments may tilt over and cause injury Furthermore the instruments at the bottom of the stack may be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments Never stack more th
192. ide quick access to some func tions for managing these messages For a detailed description on how to clear error messages or display a history of all messages refer to chapter 6 4 5 Managing Mes sages in the Info Dialog on page 64 Function Description Delete Clears the highlighted message This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Delete All Clears all messages This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Del volatile Clears all brief messages This button is available only if the history of the mes sages is displayed Show History Static Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on The most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list When the button is pressed again the list of current messages is displayed Refer to chapter 6 4 5 Managing Messages in the Info Dialog on page 64 for infor mation on how to manage messages 6 2 2 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar Messages indicate information warnings and errors They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration The follow ing messages are displayed Error There are two options Critical errors are errors that prevent the instrument from working e g a HW failure Critical errors are displayed in red color System errors are errors that concern the
193. in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control f Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument 14 1 5 5 Questionable Status Register STATus QUEStionable This register contains information on questionable instrument states Such states may occur when the instrument is not operated in compliance with its specifications To read the register use the query commands STAT QUEST COND or STAT QUEST EVEN Remote Control Basics Table 14 4 Meaning of the bits used in the questionable status register Bit No Meaning 0 15 not used 14 1 5 6 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation This condition part contains information on the actions currently being performed by the instrument while the event part contains information on the actions performed by the instrument since the last readout of the register To read the register use the query commands STAT OPER COND or STAT OPER EVEN Table 14 5 Meaning of the bits used in the operation status register Bit No Meaning 0 Calibrating The bit is set during the calibration phase 1 2 not used 3 Sweeping This bit is set during a sweep in automatic or single mode 4 15 not used 14 1 5 7 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor
194. in the 1 Q constellation diagram is shown below Q Modulation and Signal Impairment Q Q Fig 7 3 I offset left and Q offset right in the 1 Q constellation diagram 7 3 1 3 Quadrature Offset Changes the phase angle between the and Q vectors from the ideal 90 degrees while the amplitudes are maintained A positive quadrature offset results in a phase angle greater than 90 degrees The effect of a positive quadrature offset in the I Q con stellation diagram is shown below Q Fig 7 4 Positive quadrature offset in the I Q constellation diagram Q Modulation and Signal Impairment 7 3 2 General I Q Settings gt To access the settings of the I Q modulator select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Q Settings gt General Comprises the settings for setting the state and the analog wideband I Q input Mod State Switches the I Q modulation on and off Remote command SOURce IQ STATe on page 156 Crest Factor Sets the crest factor of the I Q modulation signal The crest factor gives the difference in level between the peak envelope power PEP and average power value RMS in dB This value is necessary for the generation of the correct output power at the RF output i e the instrument uses the PEP value to compensate the average power The maximum input voltage at the l Q input is equated to the peak power and is used as the reference for setting the level of the output signal Since the
195. indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 08 Page 7 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para
196. is indicated by the red state symbol in front of the corresponding instrument s name on the front panel by the orange POWER ON STANDBY button The instrument can still be remote controlled To return the instrument from standby to ready state To switch from standby to ready state use one of the following a On the remote PC select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Restart b Press the orange POWER ON STANDBY key on the front panel of the instru ment c Send the SCPI command RESTart The instrument loads the last setup with all instrument settings switches to ready state and is ready for normal operation In the R amp S SGMA GUI the ready state is indicated by the green state symbol in front of the corresponding instrument s name on the front panel by the green POWER ON STAND BY button 9 4 How to Use Computer Names To switch all connected instruments to standby state and close the R amp S SGMA GUI gt Inthe R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select File gt Shut down instruments and exit The R amp S SGMA GUI quits and switches the connected instruments to standby state For description on how to terminate work and shut down the instrument regularly refer to chapter 2 1 5 Switching the Instrument On and Off on page 16 How to Use Computer Names Provided that there is a name server in the network alternatively to the IP address each PC or instrument connected in a LAN can be
197. ists the available commands 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and th ET e Instrument A PCle connector is provided on the rear panel of the instrument Advanced Remote Control Using PCle Risk of device failure The R amp S SGU is equipped with a single lane PCle interface that supports hot plugging Do not connect an external PC to the PCle connector of the instrument during opera tion if this external PC does not support hot plugging Permitted PCle cables PCle extension cables must fulfill the following requirements single lane connectors e max cable length of 5 m For example OSS PCle CBL x1 cable from One Stop Systems or 74576 000x cable from Molex Connecting an external PC that does not support hot plugging 1 Switch off the external PC and the instrument See also chapter 2 1 5 Switching the Instrument On and Off on page 16 2 Connect the instrument and the controller with the suitable cable 3 Switch on the instrument 4 Wait until the instrument has completed the booting the POWER LED on the instrument s front panel is constantly on 5 Switch on the external PC Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU If you use the R amp S SGU as an upconverter to the R amp S SGS the R amp S SGS acts as a controller to the R amp S SGU For a description of how to connect the instruments refer to chapter 5 2 Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU on page 38 10 3 4 En
198. ith plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility fo
199. izes the settings necessary to configure the instrument for signal generation The description in this section follows the menu tree structure of the graph ical user interface Each of the discussed topis follows a common structure providing basic background information and reference to the user interface Additionally there is a section summarizing advanced configuration tasks For step by step instructions for fulfilling typical tasks refer to chapter 9 Performing Configuration Tasks on page 94 7 1 Frequency Settings Depending on the installed options the instrument provides an adjustable output fre quency in the frequency range of 10 MHz to 40 GHz To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Configuring the RF Frequency gt To change the RF frequency of the selected instrument perform one of the follow ing a Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Freq and enter the desired frequency b Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Frequency Phase gt Frequency and enter the desired frequency You have to confirm the changes of the RF frequency in the External Local Oscilla tor Settings dialog for them to be applied to the signal Frequency Sets the RF frequency at the RF output connector of the selected instrument Remote command SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed on page 155 7 2 Level and Power On Settings This section explains the level settings of the R amp S SGU The instr
200. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Unlock the instrument ck ck ck ck EEE 0k 00k 0k 000 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 ck ck 2 ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2022 UNL 12345 Adjusting Network and Remote Channel Settings In the following example we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established Lf KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KKK Reset the instrument first 11 CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck RST CLS ES SS Lock the instrument to the controller CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck LOCK 12345 Lock the instrument to avoid interference by other controllers Use an arbitrary number Response 1 Request granted i e the instrument is locked Abort program if request is refused NY CKCkCckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck A A ck ck ck ck kk Query the VISA resource strings LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20202 Programming Examples SYSTem COMMunic
201. l SCP instrument it is mandatory that the new instrument s firmware is installed prior to the E If an update to a new firmware version is required for both the R amp S SGMA GUI and the update of the R amp S SGMA GUI to the new version 1 Connect the R amp S SGU and a Windows PC to the same network 2 On the PC open a windows explorer window 3 To connect to the R amp S SGU enter the name of the instrument or its IP address in the windows taskbar 4 Enter the user name and password to connect to the R amp S SGU The default user name is instrument and the password is instrument A folder opens containing the share and the update folder 5 Open the update folder and copy the new firmware update file in it The update starts automatically O Unsuccessful or Erroneous Firmware Update An erroneous or unsuccessful installation of firmware update package is indicated by a combination of red and one orange LEDs on the front panel Refer to the Service Manual for a description of the displayed error code or contact the customer support center The description and the official company contact addresses are provided on the CD included in the delivery 9 6 How to Activate Options A firmware update prior to the activation of the SW option may be required Refer to the description of the SW option for the required firmware version See also chapter 9 5 How to Install a new Firmware Version on the Instrument on page 100 for in
202. l information e g safety instructions User Manual The User Manual is a supplement to the Getting Started manual The manual is availa ble in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In this manual all instrument functions are described in detail Further more it provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also given Service Manual The Service Manual is available in PDF format in printable form on the documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument It informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimi nation It contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replace ment of modules Web Help The content of the web helps correspond to the user manual for the latest product ver sion The web help is an additional file format that offers quick online access This format is not intended for download but rather for accessing the required information directly form the R amp S website Web helps are available at the R amp S website on the R amp S SGU product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product SGU 100A html gt Download gt Web Help Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout t
203. le Register SRE 204 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 205 Questionable Status Register STATUS QUEStionable 205 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation sss 206 Application of the Status Reporting System 206 Service REQUESE i sicacesssdavsssacaaceeneshavsnncncvag dann E hama a AE AE 206 Serial Poll 5 5 p epi be toic RSR etl vecteur e deerit esti ence RER 207 14 1 5 8 14 1 6 142 Query of an instrument status 207 Idiesgen 207 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System 208 General Programming Recommendations sss 208 Telnet program examples iuret ernannt H Hann nennen 209 List of COMMANCS 2 t 215 j gt AA PP 218 1 1 1 2 Key Features Preface The R amp S SGU is an upconverter in the frequency range of 10 MHz to 40 GHz Optimized for use in automated test equipment ATE the instrument offers very fast settling times in an exceptionally small form factor and low power consumption The R amp S SGU has LO connectors for coupling multiple generators to a common LO source and can be equipped with a mechanical step attenuator Key Features The key features of the R amp S SGU include the following e Compact size and l
204. ll plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated pur
205. lmittel oder Motoren le sind die Sicherheitshinweise des Herstellers dieser Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffe und die regional g ltigen Entsorgungsvorschriften einzuhalten Beachten Sie ggf auch die zugeh rigen speziellen Sicherheitshinweise in der Produktdokumentation Die unsachgem Be Entsorgung von Gefahren oder Betriebsstoffen kann zu Gesundheitssch den von Personen und Umweltsch den f hren Weitere Informationen zu Umweltschutz finden Sie auf der Rohde amp Schwarz Home Page 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 8 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Lisez et respectez imp rativement les instructions et consignes de s curit suivantes Les usines et sites du groupe Rohde amp Schwarz veillent la conformit des produits du groupe avec les normes de s curit en vigueur dans un souci constant de garantir aux clients le plus haut niveau de s curit possible Nos produits ainsi que les accessoires n cessaires sont fabriqu s et test s conform ment aux r gles de s curit en vigueur Le respect de ces r gles est v rifi r guli rement par notre syst me d assurance qualit Le pr sent produit a t fabriqu et contr l conform ment au certificat de conformit CE ci joint et a quitt l usine dans un parfait tat de s curit Pour le maintenir dans cet tat et en garantir une utilisation sans danger l utilisateur doit respecter l ensemble des consignes remarques de s curit et avertissements qui se trouvent dans ce man
206. lt Ntransition gt Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered for example the end of an adjustment Parameters lt Ntransition gt string Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Opera tion register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATUS Subsystem STATus OPERation PTRansition lt Ptransition gt Sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from O to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered for example the start of an adjustment Parameters lt Ptransition gt string Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status Oper ation register cause an entry to be made in the EVEN part STATus PRESet lt Preset gt Resets the status registers All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh 32767 i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERa tion and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not
207. ly required if the components are connected via a company network 4 Onthe connected remote PC start the R amp S SGMA GUI software application The main panel of the application and the configure instruments dialog open Both instruments are added automatically to the instruments list and to the main panel of the R amp S SGMA GUI software The main panel provides a quick access to the main settings of the configured and activated instruments The display shows one row per instrument with the instru ment specific settings The rows comprise the instrument the connection state the used frequency and power level and the state of the RF output and the modulator SGMA GUI File Setup Help 1 000 000 000 000 c BE Mod eer 10 00 inei Ret 5 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel the green indicator in front of the instrument s name confirms that there is a connection between the instrument and the remote PC and that the instrument is recognized by the software 6 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel select the rows corresponding to the corre sponding instruments to be configured and select Instrument Name gt Preset to restore their predefined settings 7 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt R amp S SGS gt Extension The Extension dialog opens R amp S SGU as an Extension to the R amp S SGS Tip Instrument doesn t appear in the extension dialog If the R amp S SGU is not auto
208. m The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports communica tion with the software on a command by command basis Socket connections are established on a specially defined port The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote control All instruments use port number 5025 for this purpose The port is configured for communication on a command to command basis and for remote control from a program running on a connected PC USB Interface For remote control via USB connection the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB interface A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed VISA detects and configures the R amp S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established You do not have to install a separate driver USB Resource String The syntax of the used USB resource string is USB vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial number gt INSTR where e USB denotes the used interface e lt vendor ID is the manufacturer ID for Rohde amp Schwarz Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols e product ID is the product identification of the R amp S instrument e lt serial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional You can retreive the USB resource string from the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup
209. men Sie bei Ger ten die Reinigung mit einem weichen nicht fasernden Staublappen vor Verwenden Sie keinesfalls chemische Reinigungsmittel wie z B Alkohol Aceton Nitroverd nnung Betrieb 1 Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert spezielle Einweisung und hohe Konzentration w hrend der Benutzung Es muss sichergestellt sein dass Personen die das Produkt bedienen bez glich ihrer k rperlichen geistigen und seelischen Verfassung den Anforderungen gewachsen sind da andernfalls Verletzungen oder Sachsch den nicht auszuschlieBen sind Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Arbeitsgebers Betreibers geeignetes Personal f r die Benutzung des Produkts auszuw hlen Bevor Sie das Produkt bewegen oder transportieren lesen und beachten Sie den Abschnitt Transport Wie bei allen industriell gefertigten G tern kann die Verwendung von Stoffen die Allergien hervorrufen so genannte Allergene z B Nickel nicht generell ausgeschlossen werden Sollten beim Umgang mit R amp S Produkten allergische Reaktionen z B Hautausschlag h ufiges Niesen Bindehautr tung oder Atembeschwerden auftreten ist umgehend ein Arzt aufzusuchen um die Ursachen zu kl ren und Gesundheitssch den bzw belastungen zu vermeiden Vor der mechanischen und oder thermischen Bearbeitung oder Zerlegung des Produkts beachten Sie unbedingt Abschnitt Entsorgung Punkt 1 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 5 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Bei bestimmten Produkten z B HF Fu
210. mutzte Steckdosen buchsen Stecken Sie die Steckverbindung vorrichtung fest und vollst ndig in die daf r vorgesehenen Steckdosen buchsen Missachtung dieser MaBnahmen kann zu Funken Feuer und oder Verletzungen f hren berlasten Sie keine Steckdosen Verl ngerungskabel oder Steckdosenleisten dies kann Feuer oder elektrische Schlage verursachen Bei Messungen in Stromkreisen mit Spannungen Uer gt 30 V ist mit geeigneten Ma nahmen Vorsorge zu treffen dass jegliche Gef hrdung ausgeschlossen wird z B geeignete Messmittel Absicherung Strombegrenzung Schutztrennung Isolierung usw Bei Verbindungen mit informationstechnischen Ger ten z B PC oder Industrierechner ist darauf zu achten dass diese der jeweils g ltigen IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 oder IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 entsprechen Sofern nicht ausdr cklich erlaubt darf der Deckel oder ein Teil des Geh uses niemals entfernt werden wenn das Produkt betrieben wird Dies macht elektrische Leitungen und Komponenten zuganglich und kann zu Verletzungen Feuer oder Schaden am Produkt f hren 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 4 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Wird ein Produkt ortsfest angeschlossen ist die Verbindung zwischen dem Schutzleiteranschluss vor Ort und dem Ger teschutzleiter vor jeglicher anderer Verbindung herzustellen Aufstellung und Anschluss darf nur durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen Bei ortsfesten Ger ten ohne eingebaute Sicherung Selbstschal
211. n see also chapter 6 4 1 Storing and Loading Settings on page 58 In the following the File menu of the R amp S SGMA GUI is described in detail It incor porates standard functions New Resets R amp S SGMA GUI and all connected instruments to their preset settings Open Opens the standard file open browser for loading a saved R amp S SGMA GUI file savrcl The file contains the user specific settings of a session such as instru ments configured in the software etc The complete settings of a session can be saved and loaded Only files of this type are selectable Note Instrument specific settings e g frequency and level settings are stored locally on the particular instrument itself These instruments settings are saved automatically in a predefined directory and loaded by default when starting the instrument again The files with instrument settings are not accessible Save Standard quick save of the settings of the current session if a file name previously has been applied If not the Save As dialog is opened Save as Opens the standard file save browser for saving the settings of the current session R amp S SGMA GUI files have the file extension savrcl so the name typed in is equip ped with this extension The complete settings of a session are saved Exit Quits the R amp S SGMA GUI The current settings of the instrument s session are saved and loaded by default when starting the software again Note
212. nctionality of the internal adjust ment The password is 123456 The other protection levels 2 to 4 provide access to protected service functions Only the authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments can access these functions Security Setting The R amp S SGU employs a security concept based on user and security password The Security password is required for changing several critical settings like performing firm ware updates An access to the passwords and mass storage security settings is provi ded in the Security dialog gt To access the Security dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Security Security Setting The menu is divided into the password sections and the security settings section In the password section the passwords for securing a controlled access to the instrument are defined and changed A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password All set tings are only accepted after the Change Password button is pressed o The settings of this dialog are not accessible over remote control e g SCPI com mands Change User Password The user name and password are required for remote access to the instrument via VNC FTP or SAMBA Note It is highly recommended to change the default user password before connect ing the instrument to the n
213. nd is indicated in the status bar of the display It does not change the level at the RF output Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 162 Setting Characteristic Selects the characteristic for the level setting For some general applications the instrument operation can be optimized by choosing one of the predefined level setting characteristics Auto The instrument provides the highest dynamic range and the fastest setting times according to the data sheet The RF signal is shortly blanked during the moment the step attenua tor is switched on Uninterrupted Level setting Suppresses level blanking at frequency and level changes This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument The step attenuator is fixed Strictly Monotone Provides level setting without discontinuities All electronic switches in the RF path are clamped The operation mode is useful for applica tions using level searching algorithms This mode further reduces the dynamic range of the instrument Constant VSWR Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF OUT connector due to switching of the step attenuator The step attenuator is fixed This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument Remote command SOURce POWer SCHaracteristic on page 161 Level Sets the RF level at the RF output connector of the selected instrument If you set a level offset it will be indicated in the R amp S SGMA GUI main pa
214. nd je nach ihrer Laser Klasse mit genormten Warnhinweisen versehen Laser k nnen aufgrund der Eigenschaften ihrer Strahlung und aufgrund ihrer extrem konzentrierten elektromagnetischen Leistung biologische Sch den verursachen F r zus tzliche Informationen siehe Kapitel Betrieb Punkt 7 1171 0000 41 08 Seite 2 Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise Signalworte und ihre Bedeutung Die folgenden Signalworte werden in der Produktdokumentation verwendet um vor Risiken und Gefahren zu warnen kennzeichnet eine unmittelbare Gef hrdung mit hohem Risiko die Tod oder GEFAHR schwere K rperverletzung zur Folge haben wird wenn sie nicht vermieden wird kennzeichnet eine m gliche Gef hrdung mit mittlerem Risiko die Tod oder A WARNUNG schwere K rperverletzung zur Folge haben kann wenn sie nicht vermieden wird kennzeichnet eine Gef hrdung mit geringem Risiko die leichte oder mittlere K rperverletzungen zur Folge haben k nnte wenn sie nicht vermieden wird weist auf die M glichkeit einer Fehlbedienung hin bei der das Produkt ACHTUNG Schaden nehmen kann Diese Signalworte entsprechen der im europ ischen Wirtschaftsraum blichen Definition f r zivile Anwendungen Neben dieser Definition k nnen in anderen Wirtschaftsr umen oder bei milit rischen Anwendungen abweichende Definitionen existieren Es ist daher darauf zu achten dass die hier beschriebenen Signalworte stets nur in Verbindung mit
215. ndl Telnet program examples if useSingleCommand terminate true catch const string errorString cout lt lt errorString lt lt endl client disconnect return errorCode List of Commands GALibration HREQUOSEP a ie i an a He ieee ee erate 138 CALibration IOModulator EOCaERESUIE 5 cotto eei ccr tates tios E 140 CALibration QModulator b OGal STAR inire e t icr rre al 140 CALibration QModulatomRESult vecina ated ee ep eal ken 139 CALibration IOModulator STAR rette A ia CALibration IQModulator TEMPerature CALibration LEVE RESU arisini a eere er c det arash et hatin d heed 140 Ee EC HNST RCaP D 140 CALibration LEVeli TEMBG6ratUte 2 22 rere uen inner tie 141 GONNector TRIGGER OMODE esiri erede eren gn te rene te aai ee i De Eee need 141 DIAGnostic POINEGATalIOGi s oi ee eon di and ands EXER E VR na tuent 141 DIAGnostic MEAS re POINt 1 rrr mr rere tn tr stand nes roc tint KANEA FENET ais 142 gg do REI ae ii ate FORMat BORDOR ains a FORMat SREGIStO m dira o FORMADA TA A a en a ere ds Ad INSTruments ACTive STATe s INS Tiruments COUN rS ANS Tr ments EACCess STA T l tente dened e ere eh ane den 179 INSTruments MAR Ping FEE 2 22 8 ea 179 INS Truments NAME casita a olas 180 INSTruments REMote CHAN MOL 15880 tic ct ret a ee en ak 180 JINSTE IQUOments REMote NAME ett iioc t ie eet ete
216. nel by a change in the name of this parameter from Level to Level Offset Level 30 00 dom gt ei 30 10 dBm gt 7 2 2 Level and Power On Settings Note The SCPI command SOURce POWer LEVel 1MMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display that means the level containing off set while SOURce POWer POWer sets the level at the RF output connector Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude on page 161 SOURce POWer POWer on page 163 Level Range Displays the level range within which the level setting is expected to work properly The range limits depend on several parameters like Mode Setting Characteristic the I Q signal s crest factor etc Remote command SOURce POWer RANGe LOWer on page 163 SOURce POWer RANGe UPPer on page 163 Limit Sets the level limit The value specifies the upper limit of the level at the RF OUT connector A message appears if an attempt is made to set a level above this limit and the level at the RF out put is confined to the upper limit However the level indication is not influenced The value is not affected by an instrument preset function This parameter is influenced only by the Factory Preset and its factory value is equal to the upper limit Remote command SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude on page 162 Readjust Recalculates the instrument internal settings optimized for
217. nfiguration Locked instruments will not be found by the scan function The instrument has to be unlocked to allow operation from another remote PC Note The two functions Exclusive Access and monitoring are mutually exclusive Disable Exclusive Access if the instrument is monitored by an external PC Remote command INSTruments EACCess STATe on page 179 LOCK on page 134 UNLock on page 135 Device Identity Triggers the device identification function The LAN LED on the front panel of the selected instrument blinks See also chapter 6 4 4 Bidirectional Instrument Identification on page 62 Hardware Channel Selects the hardware interface used by the remote channel Remote command INSTruments REMote CHANnel on page 180 Instrument Name IP Address Enters the IP Address or the host name of the connected instrument See also chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 Remote command INSTruments REMote NAME on page 180 Serial Number Enters the serial number as instrument s identification while using the USB or PCle interfaces for remote control Remote command INSTruments SERial on page 181 OK Confirms the settings and closes the dialog Apply Confirms the settings 6 1 2 3 6 1 2 4 Operating Menu and Toolbar Cancel Discards settings and closes the dialog Software Options Dialog Querying information about the installed options and softwa
218. ng point number first and the most significant byte last SWAPped The instrument expects with setting commands and sends with queries the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number first and the least significant byte last RST NORMal Example FORM BORD SWAP the data is transferred with the most significant bit first FORMat DATA lt Data gt Determines the data format which the R amp S SGU uses to return data When data is transferred from the control computer to the instrument the instrument detects the data format automatically In this case the value set here is irrelevant Parameters lt Data gt ASCii PACKed ASCii Numerical data is transferred as plain text separated by com mas PACKed Numerical data is transferred as binary block data The format Within the binary data depends on the command The various binary data formats are explained in the description of the parameter types RST ASCii MMEMory Subsystem Example FORM ASC The data is transferred as ASCII data FORMat SREGister Format Determines the numerical format which is returned when the status registers are quer ied Parameters Format ASCii BlNary HEXadecimal OCTal ASCii The register content is returned as a decimal number BINary The register content is returned as a binary number B is placed in front of the number HEXadecimal The register content is returned as a hexadecimal n
219. ng mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols O Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with immediate return as opposed to VXI 11 where each operation is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns Thus a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command but is delivered to the TCP IP buffers 10 1 2 3 10 1 2 4 10 1 3 For more information see also the application note 1MA208 Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this proto col messages cannot be lost Socket Communication An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network communication using sockets The socket communication also referred to as Raw Ethernet communication does not necessary require a VISA installation on the remote controller side The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built in telnet pro gra
220. nication possible no collisions the R amp S SGMA GUI always uses the LAN device name instr1 see also chap ter 10 1 2 3 VXI 11 Protocol on page 109 e X communication is not possible without collisions e viLock viUnlock communication is only possible if the remote control com mands are enclosed ina viLock viUnlock pair O The R amp S SGMA GUI uses the viLock viUnlock functions The figure below shows an example of configuration where the monitor and the con troller are two different computers connected to the same instrument over two different hardware interfaces User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 120 Using the R amp S SGMA GUI to Monitor the Remote Control Operation 4 R amp S SGMA GUI Information Interface 2 Monitor e g LAN nterface 1 e g PCle l Remote Control Controller Fig 10 5 Example of setup for remote control monitoring Connecting and configuring the monitoring PCs In the Setup gt Security gt Security Settings dialog check the state of the LAN and USB interfaces and enable them if necessary 1 Connect the monitoring PC to the instrument Note Choose the hardware interface considering the limitations described in table 10 21 2 Configure the instrument in the R amp S SGMA GUI see chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 3 In the SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Edit Instruments dialog disable Exclusiv
221. nkanlagen k nnen funktionsbedingt erh hte elektromag netische Strahlungen auftreten Unter Ber cksichtigung der erh hten Schutzw rdigkeit des unge borenen Lebens m ssen Schwangere durch geeignete MaBnahmen gesch tzt werden Auch Tr ger von Herzschrittmachern k nnen durch elektromagnetische Strahlungen gef hrdet sein Der Arbeitgeber Betreiber ist verpflichtet Arbeitsst tten bei denen ein besonderes Risiko einer Strahlen exposition besteht zu beurteilen und zu kennzeichnen und m gliche Gefahren abzuwenden Im Falle eines Brandes entweichen ggf giftige Stoffe Gase Fl ssigkeiten etc aus dem Produkt die Gesundheitssch den verursachen k nnen Daher sind im Brandfall geeignete MaBnahmen wie z B Atemschutzmasken und Schutzkleidung zu verwenden Falls ein Laser Produkt in ein R amp S Produkt integriert ist z B CD DVD Laufwerk d rfen keine anderen Einstellungen oder Funktionen verwendet werden als in der Produktdokumentation beschrie ben um Personensch den zu vermeiden z B durch Laserstrahl EMV Klassen nach EN 55011 CISPR 11 sinngem B EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Ger t der Klasse A Ein Ger t das sich f r den Gebrauch in allen anderen Bereichen auBer dem Wohnbereich und solchen Bereichen eignet die direkt an ein Niederspannungs Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind das Wohngebaude versorgt Hinweis Diese Einrichtung kann wegen m glicher auftretender leitungsgebundener als auch gestrahlten St
222. ns les tats et positions de fonctionnement indiqu s par le fabricant Tout obstacle la ventilation doit tre emp ch Le non respect des indications du fabricant peut provoquer des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entra ner la mort Pour tous les travaux les r gles locales et ou nationales de s curit et de pr vention des accidents doivent tre respect es 1 Sauf stipulations contraires les produits Rohde amp Schwarz r pondent aux exigences ci apr s faire fonctionner le produit avec le fond du bo tier toujours en bas degr de protection IP 2X degr de pollution 2 cat gorie de surtension 2 utilisation uniquement l int rieur fonctionnement une altitude max de 2000 m au dessus du niveau de la mer transport une altitude max de 4500 m au dessus du niveau de la mer tol rance de 10 96 pour la tension nominale et de 5 96 pour la fr quence nominale 2 Ne jamais placer le produit sur des surfaces v hicules d p ts ou tables non appropri s pour raisons de stabilit ou de poids Suivre toujours strictement les indications d installation du fabricant pour le montage et la fixation du produit sur des objets ou des structures par exemple parois et tag res En cas d installation non conforme la documentation produit il y a risque de blessures voire de mort 3 Ne jamais placer le produit sur des dispositifs g n rant de la chaleur par exemple radiate
223. nse 100002 100006 100008 INSTruments REMote CHANnel Response LAN USB PCIe INSTruments REMote NAME Response rssgul100a100002 rssgs100a100006 rssgt100a100008 KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Check the instrument state and activate instruments if required KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKK KKK KKK INSTruments ACTive STATe Response 0 1 1 INSTruments ACTive STATe ON OFF OFF Activates the first instruments in the list i e the instruments with symbolic names SGS 100006 LEE EEE EEE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ck ck ck ck ck 2 2 2 kc k ko kc kckok Export the configuration into a mapping file KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK Sk ke Sk ke A Sk A kc ko INSTruments MAPPing FILE d mapping files mapping map KREKEKKKKKKKKKKEKKKEKKE KKK KE ck KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck kc k ko ko Enable exclusive access for the selected instrument RARA RAR RRA RRA RRA KKK KKK KK KKK kk ck ck Sk ko ck ck ok ko ck ck kk kk RAR RRA RRA oko INSTruments EACCess STATe Response 0 0 0 11 2 Common Commands INSTruments EACCess STATe ON OFF OFF Locks the first instrument Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 62
224. o de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de dafios en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pafio suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyen
225. oduct releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los est ndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados seg n las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garant a de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las
226. odulator TEMPerature Queries the delta temperature since the last adjustment of the IQ modulator Return values Temperature string Usage Query only CALibration IQModulator LOCal STARt Starts an adjustment for the I Q modulator of the current frequency The I Q modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage I Q imbalance and quadrature Query the result of the adjustment with the SCPI command CALibration IOModulator LOCal RESult See Calibration process of the R amp S SGU on page 137 for a step by step description of the calibration process Usage Event CALibration IQModulator LOCal RESuIt Queries the result of the I Q modulation adjustment for the current frequency Start the adjustment with the SCPI command CALibration IOModulator LOCal STARt on page 140 Return values Result 0 1 RUNning STOPped Usage Query only CALibration LEVel STARt Starts an internal level adjustment Query the result of the adjustment with the SCPI command CALibration LEVel RESult See Calibration process of the R amp S SGU on page 137 for a step by step description of the calibration process Usage Event CALibration LEVel RESult Queries the result of the internal level adjustment Start the adjustment with the SCPI command CALibration LEVel STARt Return values lt Result gt 0 1 RUNning STOPped CONNector Subsystem Usage Query only CALibration LEVel TEMPer
227. of the R amp S SGU 1 Set the parameters of the R amp S SGU like frequency and level in the R amp S SGMA GUI as needed 2 Open the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ext Local Oscillator dialog and read the settings for Frequency and Level 3 Apply the required changes to the LO 4 Press the Confirm External LO Settings button to confirm that you have made the settings on the LO The desired signal is output by the R amp S SGU Frequency Shows the desired frequency for the LO input signal Remote command SOURce LOSCillator FREQuency on page 159 Level Shows the desired level for the LO input signal Remote command SOURce LOSCillator POWer on page 159 Confirm External LO Settings Outputs the signal Remote command SOURce SETTings APPLy IMMediate on page 155 Trigger Connector Settings 7 6 Trigger Connector Settings To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Connector This dialog comprises the settings for configuring the connector Trigger Connector Mode Determines the signal at the input output of the multi purpose TRIG connector Signal Valid Output of high signal to mark valid frequency and level settings Not Signal Output of high signal to mark the transition state when frequency and Valid level change Pulse Mod Ext Input for an externally provided pulse modulation signal Source Used when an external pulse modulator source is provid
228. of the software on a Windows XP computer During installation the operation system is checked The installation will be terminated if this requirement is not fulfilled National Instruments NI VISA VISA drivers can be obtained from R amp S or NI directly version 3 4 1 or higher optional or Agilent VISA version 14 or higher optional CPU At least Pentium or compatible as from 1 GHz recommended VGA color display resolution At least 800 600 pixels Installing a new software version Administrator rights are necessary for installation and starting gt In Windows Explorer double click SGMA GUI_V VV VVV VVV exe and follow the instructions 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 Connecting an External PC and Devices Uninstalling an old software version An uninstallation of a previous version of the SW can be performed prior to the installa tion of the new one but is not mandatory gt To uninstall this version go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs and select the entry SGMA GUI V VV VVV VVV The script file identifies and removes all currently installed R amp S SGMA GUI soft ware items Connecting a Remote PC via LAN The R amp S SGU is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ether net LAN local area network The interface can be used for example To connect an external computer for manual control of the instrument by means of the R amp S SGMA G
229. oll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence short timeout OPC 3 Areturn value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 4 Resettimeout to former value 5 Clear the error queue with SYStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrup ted entries Using several threads in the controller application As an alternative provided the programming environment of the controller application supports threads separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for control ling the instrument s via SCPI A thread waiting for a OPC thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other instruments 14 1 5 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue You can query both with the commands of the STATus Subsystem 14 1 5 1 Hierarchy of the Status Registers The figure 14 1 shows the hierarchical structure of information in the status registers ascending from left to right Remote Control Basics Output Queue U Error Event Queue AL Service Request to controller at transition from O to 1 0 4 9 pOT 0 4 31 PE L2 p 2 QUES SCHIEN MAY SCHEN ES O gt OPER be 7 Fig 14 1 G
230. on A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level The pass word for the first level is 123456 Example SYSTem PROTectl STATe ON activates protection level 1 SYSTem PROTect1 STATe OFF 123456 deactivates protection level 1 SYSTem STARtup COMPlete Queries if the startup of the instrument is completed Return values lt Complete gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SYST STAR COMP Response 1 The startup of the instrument is completed Usage Query only TEST Subsystem The TEST system contains the commands for performing the routines R amp S SGU can not perform the selftest on its own Therefore a connection with a signal generator is needed If you use a compatible R amp S signal generator then the calibration process will TEST Subsystem be completed automatically after starting the calibration process Otherwise you have to follow the steps described in Calibration process of the R amp S SGU on page 137 In the given example replace the CALibration xxx STARt SCPI command with TEST ALL STARt and CALibration xxx RESult With TEST ALL RESult We assume that a remote PC is connected to the instruments the remote PC and the instruments are switched on and a connection between them is established The self tests returns a 0 if the test is performed successfully otherwise a value other than 0 is returned None of the commands of this system has a RST value Improper use may de
231. operating system e g wrong file path System errors are displayed in black color e Information Main Panel The information e g file not found is displayed in black color Warning A warning indicates a less significant error and is displayed in black color Brief message Brief messages report automatic settings in the program e g switching on illegal entries that are not accepted by the program e g range violations They are dis played in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Brief messages usually do not demand user actions and disappear automatically after a short period of time They are stored in the history however e Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further program operation The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct software operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history 6 3 Main Panel The main panel of the R amp S SGMA GUI provides quick access to the main settings of the configured instruments The display shows one row per instrument and comprises the instrument name and state the used frequency and power level the states of the RF output and modulator and the used reference so
232. operation All necessary system settings can be made in the Setup dialog 2 3 Connecting an External PC and Devices As a rule the R amp S SGU is operated exclusively via remote control on a connected PC Another way to control the instrument is the manual operation via the R amp S SGMA GUI software on the connected PC Both the remote control and the manual operation of the instrument require an external controller For the prerequisites and the instructions on how to configure an external controller for remote control refer to the User Manual A brief introduction to the remote control capabilities is provided in chapter 10 Network and Remote Control Operation on page 103 This section gives an introduction on how to configure the external PC for manual operation see chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC on page 20 In addition to connecting an external controller it may be useful to connect other exter nal devices e g a memory stick The following interfaces are provided on the rear panel of the instrument see also chapter 3 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 27 e PCI Express refer to chapter 2 3 3 Connecting a Controller via PCI Express on page 23 e USB interface refer to chapter 2 3 4 Connecting a Controller or an USB Device via USB on page 23 e LAN interface refer to chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 21 2 3 1 Connecting an External PC and De
233. operation can be ensured The Info window with a list of current messages and a detailed descrip tion of each message can be opened with the Info button see also chapter 6 2 1 Info Dialog on page 53 Status Information The status messages are displayed in the Info line of the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and set tings of the instrument The states are indicated for information only and do not neces sitate any action by the user Status Information displayed in the Info line AttFixed Attenuator fixed mode is active The uninterrupted level settings are made in a fixed range without attenuator switching The variation range is set automatically when this mode is activated The range is dis played with the parameter SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt Attenuator Fixed Range Error Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in differ ent colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibra tion data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data See also chapter 6 2 1 Info Dialog on page 53 and chapter 6 2 2 Understanding the Messages in the Info Bar on page 54 Volatile messages Volatile messages report automatic settings
234. orm Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Character strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Remote Control Basics Example HCOP ITEM LABel Testl or HCOP ITEM LABel Testl Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure Example FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 14 1 3 4 Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the
235. orne de conducteur de protection Courant continu alternatif CC CA Borne de mise la terre L appareil est conforme aux exigences de s curit du degr de protection II appareil enti rement prot g par isolation double renforc e Borne de mise la masse du b ti ou du boitier Marquage UE pour batteries et accumulateurs L appareil contient une batterie ou un accumulateur Ces pi ces ne peuvent pas tre limin es avec les d chets urbains non tri s mais doivent faire l objet d une collecte s par e Pour plus d informations voir la page 7 Avis prudence lors de la manipulation de composants sensibles aux d charges lectrostatiques Marquage UE pour la collecte s par e d quipements lectriques et lectroniques Les d chets d quipements lectriques et lectroniques ne peuvent pas tre limin s avec les d chets urbains non tri s mais doivent faire l objet d une collecte s par e Pour plus d informations voir la page 7 gt gt mumgP P Avertissement rayon laser Les produits laser sont munis d avertissements normalis s d apr s leur cat gorie laser En raison des caract ristiques de leur rayonnement ainsi que de leur puissance lectromagn tique extr mement concentr e les lasers peuvent causer des dommages biologiques Pour plus d informations voir le chapitre Fonctionnement point 7 1171 0000 43 08 Pa
236. ource class Socket communication requires the specification of the port commonly referred to as port number and of SOCKET to complete the VISA resource string with the associ ated protocol used The registered port for socket communication is port 5025 See also chapter 10 1 2 4 Socket Communication on page 109 Example Instrument has the IP address 10 113 11 91 the valid resource string using VXI 11 protocol is TCPIP 10 113 11 912 2INSTR e The DNS host name name is rssgu100a100021 the valid resource string is TCPIP rssgul100a100021 hislipO0 HiSLIP TCPIP rssgul100a100021 inst0 VXI 11 e Araw socket connection can be established using TCBPIP 10 113 11 91 25025 50CKET 10 1 2 2 HiSLIP Protocol The HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol is the successor protocol for VXI 11 for TCP based instruments specified by the IVI foundation The protocol uses two TCP sockets for a single connection one for fast data transfer the other for non sequential control commands e g Device Clear or SRO HiSLIP has the following characteristics High performance as with raw socket network connections e Compatible IEEE 488 2 support for Message Exchange Protocol Device Clear Serial Poll Remote Local Trigger and Service Request e Uses a single IANA registered port 4880 which simplifies the configuration of fire walls e Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locki
237. ow power consumption e Remote connection via PCI Express minimizing time for setup Alternatively LAN or USB connections available e Coherent LO input and output connectors also usable as MIMO input output and phase coherent I Q demodulation Linux operating system e Graphical user interface R amp S SGMA GUI to set up and control one or more R amp S SGU instruments simultaneously from one remote computer available for Windows and Linux systems Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S SGU consists of the following parts e Getting Started printed manual e Documentation CD ROM with Online help system chm as a standalone help User Manual for base unit and options Service manual Data sheet and product brochure Links to useful sites on the R amp S internet R amp S SGMA GUI Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the R amp S SGMA GUI software It offers quick context sensitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming The online help contains help on operating the R amp S SGU and all available options Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start work 1 3 Typographical Conventions ing with the instrument Basic operations and typical measurement examples are described The manual includes also genera
238. pe serverAddress sin port htons currentPort memcpy char amp serverAddress sin addr s addr currentHostInfo h addr list 0 currentHostInfo h length if connect currentSocketDescr struct sockaddr amp serverAddress sizeof serverAddress 0 throw string can t connect server n clientIsConnected true void TcpClient disconnect if clientIsConnected close currentSocketDescr currentSocketDescr 0 currentHostName M currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false void TcpClient transmit string amp txString if clientIsConnected throw string connection must be established before any data can be sent n char transmitBuffer new char txString length 1 Telnet program examples memcpy transmitBuffer txString c str txString length transmitBuffer txString length n newline is needed if send currentSocketDescr transmitBuffer txString length 1 0 0 throw string can t transmit data n delete transmitBuffer void TcpClient receive string amp rxString if clientIsConnected throw string connection must be established before any data can be received n char receiveBuffer new char receiveBufferSize memset receiveBuffer 0 receiveBufferSize bool receiving true while receiving int receivedByteCount recv curr
239. peration of the controller are assumed A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals Refer to the Getting Started manual for an example on how to set up remote control connection over LAN using VXI 11 protocol To set up a Telnet connection To control the software only a telnet program is required The telnet program is part of every operating system 1 To establish a Telnet connection with the R amp S SGU start the telnet program and enter the socket address The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the R amp S SGU and the number of the port configured for remote control via telnet Tip The R amp S SGU uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Telnet Run ie Type the name of a program folder document or Internet D resource and Windows will open it for you Open telnet 10 113 11 91 5025 X Le Cancel Browse The connection to the instrument is set up and remote control commands can be sent 2 Even if the cursor is not visible on the screen enter blind a remote control com mand and confirm with Enter User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 112 R amp S SGU100A Network and Remote Control Operation E Telnet 10 113 11 91 Freq 1500000000 10 3 Advanced Remote Control Using PCle The PCle bus is a high speed serial bus composed of point to point serial links A pair of serial links one transmitting
240. pose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks an
241. ps for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU b Connect the RF OUT of the R amp S SGS to the LO IN of the R amp S SGU 2 Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU The POWER ON STANDBY keys have to be green and not blinking 3 Press the ID keys on the front panels of the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU 4 Onthe connected remote PC start the R amp S SGMA GUI software application The main panel of the application and the configure instruments dialog open Both instruments are added automatically to the instruments list and to the main panel of the R amp S SGMA GUI software Setup Help la 1 000 000 000 000 stz BE J scu t00014 rreg 1 000000 000 000 BE x Note If you connect the instruments to the company network for the first time this process may take several minutes 5 In the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel the green indicator in front of the instrument s name confirms that there is a connection between the instrument and the remote PC and that the instrument is recognized by the software 6 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt R amp S SGS gt Extension The Extension dialog opens Setups for Connecting an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU Tip Instrument doesn t appear in the extension dialog If the R amp S SGU is not auto matically shown in this dialog press Scan gt Start to find the instrument 7 Select the R amp S SGU from the list and set Available Instruments
242. quipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol They are connected using an RJ45 cable shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5 The TCP IP net work protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instru Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols ment Software for instrument control and for specified protocols only the VISA pro gram library must be installed on the controller E Identifying instruments in a network If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource string 10 1 2 1 VISA Resource Strings The VISA resource string is required to establish a communication session between the controller and the instrument in a LAN The resource string is a unique identifier composed of the specific IP address of the instrument and some network and VISA specific keywords TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR e TCPIP designates the network protocol used e host address is the IP address or host name of the device See also chapter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 e LAN device name defines the protocol and the instanc
243. r accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 08 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 f handling the pr
244. r compatible signal generator If you connect a controller host PC or compatible signal generator to the R amp S SGU the R amp S SGU acts as an USB device To connect the controller to the USB interface of the R amp S SGU always connect the USB Type Micro B connector to the R amp S SGU Refer to the documentation of the controller to find out which USB connector type you can connect to the controller The figure 2 1 illustrates schematically the required connector type to emphasize on the different connector shape Fig 2 1 USB Type Micro B connectors An external PC with installed R amp S SGMA GUI is required for manual operation of the R amp S SGU On the remote PC perform the steps as described in chapter 2 3 2 3 Automatically adding instruments to the SGMA GUI on page 22 Connecting an USB device If you connect an USB device Memory stick CD ROM an instrument to the R amp S SGU the R amp S SGU acts as a host Connecting an External PC and Devices To connect an USB device to the interface of the R amp S SGU always connect the USB Type Micro A connector to the R amp S SGU Refer to the documentation of the USB device to find out which USB connector type you can connect to the USB device The figure 2 2 illustrates schematically the required connector type to emphasize on the different connector shape Fig 2 2 USB Type Micro A connectors If you connect an R amp S SGS to an R amp S SGU via an USB cable perform t
245. r messages display list 171 Eiror queue reet Error queue query Error queues recommendati ns u 209 ESR event status register EVEN cien ne Event status enable register ESE 205 Remota entis sa 130 Event status register ESR 205 ano 2 iba Hier 131 Expiration date of option ss 82 Extension mode Higher frequency External controller 4 Ext mal devices i oie ce eii Ed External reference COMME T 28 F Factory present 91 Factory recovery See Service Manual sss 101 Fast settings File list ans ee HO Firmware update Select Package u een 86 Several instruments oooococcnnnccccnoccccnonccconancconanrncannnnos 100 Update all s neue 87 Firmware version 82 Floating NCOMCOS cis scons nidad 82 Frequency 97 65 Limitto BGHZ ii en ne ea a 91 Frequency range extension 94 Function check uoce tib dee ertet dax 18 G Gain IMPAIRNEN n cues chives hex nt ee i item 69 Gain imbalance ai ettet cr ae 69 G8le Way ceti tbi o emmener lacs 89 H Hardware R QUIN MENTS resista rro there rea eode adn 20 Hardware options u see eier 80 HISUP anne enden 103 A Hr tto Hee ne e tb eas 108 Resource string HISTOR vta ee bl eur Changing Default Hostname prefix 1 Q COMM ECIONS eet cess ne acid 28 l Qimpalrmieints sir airis 69
246. rameters lt Path gt string String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the content of the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values lt FileCount gt integer Number of files Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Query only MMEMory CDIRectory Directory Changes the default directory for mass memory storage The directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them Parameters Directory directory name String containing the path to another directory The path may be relative or absolute To change to a higher directory use two dots Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory COPY lt SourceFile gt lt DestinationFile gt Copies an existing file to a new file Instead of just a file this command can also be used to copy a complete directory together with all its files MMEMory Subsystem Setting parameters lt SourceFile gt string String containing the path and file name of the source file If lt destination gt is not specified source is copied to the MMEM CDIR directory Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message lt DestinationFile gt string String containing the path and name of the target file The path may
247. raphical overview of the status registers hierarchy OPER Operation Status Summary Bit RQS MSS Service Request Generation ESB Standard Event Status Summary Bit MAV Message Available in Output Queue QUES Querstionable Status Summary Bit 2 Error Event Queue 1 0 not used Note This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register The R amp S SGU uses the following status registers e Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable SRE see chapter 14 1 5 3 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE on page 204 Remote Control Basics e Standard Event Status i e the Event status Register ESR and the Event Status Enable ESE see chapter 14 1 5 4 Event Status Register ESR and Event Sta tus Enable Register ESE on page 205 e Questionable Status and Operation Status the SCPI status registers see chap ter 14 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 202 chapter 14 1 5 5 Questionable Status Register STATus QUEStionable on page 205 and chap ter 14 1 5 6 Operation Status Register STATus OPERation on page 206 e Output Queue The output queue contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAY bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview Error Event Queue The error event queue contains all errors and events that have occurred in the past When
248. re consulter le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz Ne pas brancher le connecteur dans des prises d alimentation sales ou poussi reuses Enfoncer fermement le connecteur jusqu au bout de la prise Le non respect de cette mesure peut provoquer des tincelles incendies et ou blessures Ne pas surcharger les prises les c bles prolongateurs ou les multiprises cela pouvant provoquer des incendies ou chocs lectriques En cas de mesures sur les circuits lectriques d une tension efficace 30 V prendre les pr cautions n cessaires pour viter tout risque par exemple quipement de mesure appropri fusibles limitation de courant coupe circuit isolation etc En cas d interconnexion avec des quipements informatiques comme par exemple un PC ou un ordinateur industriel veiller ce que ces derniers soient conformes aux normes IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 ou IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 en vigueur Sauf autorisation expresse il est interdit de retirer le couvercle ou toute autre pi ce du boitier lorsque le produit est en cours de service Les c bles et composants lectriques seraient ainsi accessibles ce qui peut entra ner des blessures des incendies ou des d g ts sur le produit 1171 0000 43 08 Page 4 Consignes de s curit fondamentales Si un produit est connect de fa on stationnaire tablir avant toute autre connexion le raccordement du conducteur de protection local et du conducteur de protection du produit
249. re version gt To access the dialog select Setup gt Software An info dialog opens showing program information Firmware In the group box Firmware the following columns are displayed Package Installed software packages e g SW platform Version Release of the software package Reset SGMA GUI Resets R amp S SGMA GUI to its factory preset settings The connected instruments are not affected by this preset To preset one specific instrument to its factory preset settings select SGMA GUI Instrument Name gt Setup gt Factory Preset Refer to chapter 8 9 Factory Preset on page 90 for an overview of the settings affected by this function Help The R amp S SGMA GUI is equipped with a context sensitive help function A help page can be called any time during software operation The context sensitive page which is opened with the F1 button is part of a comprehen sive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system An overview of the contents of the online help can be reached via the menu SGMA GUI gt Help gt Contents Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar A search for keywords within the help function is available via menu item SGMA GUI gt Help gt Index 6 2 Info Dialog and Messages in the Info Bar A few operating states and the current messages are displayed in the info line For information on messages in greater detail
250. rgr Ben im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen In diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene MaBnahmen durchzuf hren Ger t der Klasse B Ein Ger t das sich f r den Betrieb im Wohnbereich sowie in solchen Bereichen eignet die direkt an ein Niederspannungs Versorgungsnetz angeschlossen sind das Wohngeb ude versorgt Reparatur und Service 1 Das Produkt darf nur von daf r autorisiertem Fachpersonal ge ffnet werden Vor Arbeiten am Produkt oder ffnen des Produkts ist dieses von der Versorgungsspannung zu trennen sonst besteht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages Abgleich Auswechseln von Teilen Wartung und Reparatur darf nur von R amp S autorisierten Elektrofachkr ften ausgef hrt werden Werden sicherheitsrelevante Teile z B Netzschalter Netztrafos oder Sicherungen ausgewechselt so d rfen diese nur durch Originalteile ersetzt werden Nach jedem Austausch von sicherheitsrelevanten Teilen ist eine Sicherheitspr fung durchzuf hren Sichtpr fung Schutzleitertest Isolationswiderstand Ableitstrommessung Funktionstest Damit wird sichergestellt dass die Sicherheit des Produkts erhalten bleibt Batterien und Akkumulatoren Zellen Werden die Hinweise zu Batterien und Akkumulatoren Zellen nicht oder unzureichend beachtet kann dies Explosion Brand und oder schwere Verletzungen von Personen unter Umst nden mit Todesfolge verursachen Die Handhabung von Batterien und Akkumulatoren mit alkalischen El
251. rnet simple Telnet TCPIP host address LAN device name lt port gt SOCKET Library VISA or socketcontroller USB USBTMC A USB connector is located on the USB vendor ID gt lt product ID rear panel of the instrument serial number gt INSTR For details see chapter 10 1 3 USB Library VISA Interface on page 109 PCIe Proprietary A PCIe connector is located on the PCIe vendor ID gt lt product ID gt rear panel of the instrument lt serial number gt INSTR For details see chapter 10 1 4 PCI Library pciecontroller Express Interface on page 110 VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN when using VXI 11 or HiSLIP protocol or USB However no VISA installation is necessary for remote control while using socket communication For more information about VISA refer to the user documentation Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols For information on how to query the VISA resource strings see chapter 8 8 Remote Channels on page 90 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI commands are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at
252. roblems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC cla
253. ror text there is an explanation as to the respective error Device Specific Error Messages The following table contains all error messages specific for the instrument in alphabeti cal order as well as an explanation of the error situation The positive error codes mark the errors specific of the instrument The device specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Device Specific Error Messages Error Code 180 Error Adjustment failed Description Adjustment could not be executed Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the device 182 Adjustment data miss ing Adjustment data are missing The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the instrument 183 Adjustment data inva lid Adjustment data are invalid and must be restored The adjustment data have to be generated again by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the instrument 200 201 Cannot access hard ware Hardware revision out of date The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected The module is not installed not properly installed or missing
254. rror queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Telnet program examples The following program example shows a simple TcpClient class that is intended to explain on how to get started with programming of sockets The example sets up a socket communication to R amp S SGU and opens a simple user interface very similar to the telnet which allows input of commands To enable real automation further development of the program is required TcpClient h finclude string defines structs for socket handling include lt netinet in h gt using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient public TcpClient TcpClient void connectToServer string amp hostname int port void disconnect void transmit string amp txString void receive string amp rxString string getCurrentHostName const int getCurrentPort const private string currentHostName int currentPort int currentSocketDescr SockAddrStruct serverAddress HostInfoStruct currentHostInfo bool clientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize Telnet program examples TcpClient cpp finclude string defines structs for socket handling include lt netinet in h gt using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient p
255. rsess 142 FORMat Subsystem iiie iteseu nea stiu tuus aoa ku ae siae aan no Rapid sna D ERR 143 MMEMory SubsysStem iere nete noi na ia AN RESES inar iras nna siarane 144 File Naming Conventions is 145 Extensions for User Files 145 Examples REDE DLL LEN 146 Remote Control Commands ss 147 OUTPut Subsystoem 5 nennen nri r ESSA ANNANS ISENE SANANA e 153 UTA AAA a 155 SOURce IQ Subsystem iie trier a 156 SOURce Local Oscillator Subsystem eene 158 SOURce POWer Subsystem ss 160 SOURce PULM Subsystems sieccccicssccccscssscteccessssecccessesccceteceesteecenssssaeeenssescteccsseneets 163 STATUS Subsystem 2 cetcece ces secetecess cetctecessosecdecscseectecessaaaate dre nip Ira san RAD RR nn 164 SYSTEM Subsystem ctscece caricia inci 168 TEST Subsystem irc ii ii RP range 176 P INEDIC a 178 R amp S SGMA GUI Settings eiie reitera nein aa itte aa sete sae ERR aas raus 178 User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 7 12 12 1 12 2 13 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 3 13 4 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 1 3 1 14 1 3 2 14 1 3 3 14 1 3 4 14 1 3 5 14 1 3 6 14 1 4 14 1 4 1 14 1 5 14 1 5 1 14 1 5 2 14 1 5 3 14 1 5 4 14 1 5 5 14 1 5 6 14 1 5 7 Maintenance disease eee ei 182 1041 unn 182 Storing
256. rte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o dafios en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente
257. rts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area w
258. s gt To access the pulse connector trigger settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Pulse Modulation gt Connector Trigger Comprises the settings necessary to configure the signal at the multi purpose TRIG connector in the external trigger mode Trigger Connector Mode Determines the signal at the input output of the multi purpose TRIG connector Signal Valid Output of high signal to mark valid frequency and level settings Not Signal Output of high signal to mark the transition state when frequency and Valid level change Pulse Mod Ext Input for an externally provided pulse modulation signal Source Used when an external pulse modulator source is provided at the connector Remote command CONNector TRIGger OMODe on page 141 7 5 External Local Oscillator Settings In a setup where an R amp S SGU is connected to an incompatible signal generator local oscillator the controller has to change the frequency and the level of this local oscilla tor LO in order to output the desired signal from the R amp S SGU The required settings of the local oscillator are shown in the Local Oscillator dialog gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Ext Local Oscilla tor External Local Oscillator Settings When changing any parameters which affect the output signal of the combined system of an incompatible LO and an R amp S SGU follow these steps Setting the signal
259. s fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n Ug gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salv
260. s Produkts zu erhalten Zellen oder Batterien m ssen wiederverwertet werden und d rfen nicht in den Restm ll gelangen Akkumulatoren oder Batterien die Blei Quecksilber oder Cadmium enthalten sind Sonderabfall Beachten Sie hierzu die landesspezifischen Entsorgungs und Recycling Bestimmungen Transport 1 Das Produkt kann ein hohes Gewicht aufweisen Daher muss es vorsichtig und ggf unter Verwendung eines geeigneten Hebemittels z B Hubwagen bewegt bzw transportiert werden um R ckensch den oder Verletzungen zu vermeiden Griffe an den Produkten sind eine Handhabungshilfe die ausschlieBlich f r den Transport des Produkts durch Personen vorgesehen ist Es ist daher nicht zul ssig Griffe zur Befestigung an bzw auf Transportmitteln z B Kr nen Gabelstaplern Karren etc zu verwenden Es liegt in Ihrer Verantwortung die Produkte sicher an bzw auf geeigneten Transport oder Hebemitteln zu befestigen Beachten Sie die Sicherheitsvorschriften des jeweiligen Herstellers eingesetzter Transport oder Hebemittel um Personensch den und Sch den am Produkt zu vermeiden Falls Sie das Produkt in einem Fahrzeug benutzen liegt es in der alleinigen Verantwortung des Fahrers das Fahrzeug in sicherer und angemessener Weise zu f hren Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r Unf lle oder Kollisionen Verwenden Sie das Produkt niemals in einem sich bewegenden Fahrzeug sofern dies den Fahrzeugf hrer ablenken k nnte Sichern Si
261. s frequency level RF state IQ modulator state crest factor host frequency host level apply settings and will send SCPI messages in all other cases Setting Up a Remote Control Connection via Fast Socket Windows Operating Systems To set up a remote control connection via Fast Socket for Windows operating systems perform the following steps 1 Connect the controller and the instrument see chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 21 2 Install the protocol driver to the controller see chapter 10 4 2 Installing the Proto col Driver on page 119 3 On the controller start the driver by using one of the following a Start the Windows console user interface as an administrator and execute the net start SGMANDISPROT command b Use a program for opening the driver An example file is provided on the Documentation CD SguDriverDemo c 4 Start the application with administrator rights 5 Enable fast settings see chapter 10 4 3 Enabling Fast Settings on page 119 10 4 2 10 4 3 Advanced Remote Control Using Fast Socket Linux Operating Systems To set up a remote control connection vie Fast Socket for Linux operating systems perform the following steps 1 Connect the controller and the instrument see chapter 2 3 2 Connecting a Remote PC via LAN on page 21 2 Start the application as root 3 Enable fast settings see chapter 10 4 3 Enabling Fast Settings on page 119 In
262. s the R amp S SGU is mainly intended to be remote controlled the front panel of the R amp S SGU contains no display but mostly LEDs to inform the user about the status of the instrument The user inter face can be displayed on a remote PC station used to manually remote control the instrument SGMA UPCONVERTER ROHDE amp SCHWARZ R amp S SGU100A 20 GHzIQ 0 RFON Loin ERROR RRO WARNING Fig 3 1 Front panel view POWER ON STAND BY 0 The POWER ON STAND BY key switches the instrument from the standby to ready state or vice versa In ready state the button is green The instrument is ready for operation In standby state the button is orange In this state it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply A blinking green color indicates that a booting operation is in proccess RF ON Front Panel Tour The RF ON key switches the RF signal on or off If activated the button is green LO IN The LO IN LED indicates the compatibility of the level of the LO input signal with the correct operation of the R amp S SGU Green indicates that the level of the LO input signal is in the range of correct oper ation e Red indicates that the level of the LO input signal is too high or too low e No light indicates that the instrument is in a bypass mode ERROR WARNING ERROR WARNING The ERROR WARNING LED indicates the status of the R amp S SGU
263. scription of the syntax of the VISA resource strings refer to the description of the corresponding interface in chapter 10 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 103 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate HISLip RESource on page 173 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource on page 173 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource on page 174 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource on page 174 SYSTem COMMunicate PCIexpress RESource on page 174 Device Identity Triggers the device identification function The LAN LED on the front panel of the selected instrument blinks See also chapter 6 4 4 Bidirectional Instrument Identification on page 62 Factory Preset The Factory Preset dialog provides a function to reset the instrument s settings to their factory states Eco Mode 1 To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Factory Preset O O Resets instrument to factory configuration Security settings and user data are not effected 2 Select Execute Factory Preset The instrument s settings are reset to their factory states Security settings and user data are not effected Execute Factory Preset Reset the instrument s settings to their factory state Note Because Factory Preset resets the Remote Channel Settings and Network Settings to the default values executing factory preset via remote control may termi nate the connection to the instrument i
264. signal does not usually supply the peak power at a constant level and instead supplies a lower average power the crest factor specifies how many dB have to be added internally so that the correct output power is achieved Remote command SOURce IQ CRESt actor on page 158 Q Modulation and Signal Impairment 7 3 3 Analog Impairment Settings gt To access the settings of the I Q modulator select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Q Settings gt Analog Impairments Comprises the settings like I Q offset and quadrature offset State Activates deactivates 1 Q impairments If activated the settings for offset gain imbalance and quadrature offset become effec tive Note It is advisable to switch automatic level control to the Off Table mode as oth erwise level errors may occur Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment STATe on page 157 Offset Sets the carrier offset in percent of the amplitudes scaled to the peak envelope power PEP for the and or Q signal component An ideal I Q modulator suppresses the carrier offset completely offset 0 percent For more information see chapter 7 3 1 2 and Q Offset on page 70 Remote command SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage I on page 157 SOURce IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q on page 157 Gain Imbalance Sets the imbalance of the and Q vector see chapter 7 3 1 1 Gain and Gain Imbal ance on page 69 The entry is ma
265. speci fied in greater detail by querying the STATus QUEStionable status register 4 MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller 5 ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register 6 MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE 7 STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENT bit is set in the OPERat ion status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERat ion status register Remote Control Basics 14 1 5 4 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE corresponds to the E
266. splays the Subnet mask To enter the Subnet mask manually select Static Address Mode This number is used together with the IP address to identify the network segment the instrument is in It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK on page 173 Default Gateway Displays the IP address of the default gateway To enter the default gateway manually select Static Address Mode This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network is coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway on page 173 Apply Applies the network settings to the instrument 8 8 8 9 Remote Channels Remote Channels The Remote dialog provides access to the settings for remote control gt To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote Visa Resource Strings Indicates the VISA resource strings used for remote control of the instrument A sepa rate string is provided for remote control via the different interfaces Note For background information and de
267. sses in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after pa
268. stalling the Protocol Driver The protocol driver defines the way to communicate with the instrument via the LAN Fast Socket interface For Linux operating system no special driver is needed For Windows operating systems the SGMANDISPROT driver is required The protocol driver is installed automatically together with the installation of the R amp S SGMA GUI software It is additionally provided on the CD included in the delivery To install the driver manually on a Windows operating system 1 Open Control Panel Network and Sharing Center 2 Select the network adapter on which you want to install the driver and click on it The Local Area Connection Status dialog opens Click Properties to open the Local Area Connection Properties dialog Click Install to open the Select Network Feature Type dialog Select Protocol and click Add ona o In the Select Network Protocol dialog click Have Disk navigate to the directory where the driver is saved and click OK to install the driver Enabling Fast Settings gt To enable the fast settings for the Fast Socket call function rssgu UseFastSettings ViSession instrumentHandle ViBoolean fastEnabled ViBoolean asynchronousEnabled included in the instru ment driver Settings for some parameters like level and frequency will accelerate To disable the fast settings call the function rssgu_UseFastSettings with argu ment fastEnabled false R amp S
269. stroy the assembly The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the TEST DIRect command any safety mechanisms are bypassed The command is used for servicing purposes and should not be applied by the user DESRAL START CT 177 TES TALC RESINA de 177 TESTREYBOMOANOTATO oia drid dt id 177 TEST ALL STARt Starts a selftest Use the command TEST ALL RESult to query the result Use CALibration HREQuest to query for settings required by the instrument Usage Event TEST ALL RESult Queries the result of the performed selftest Start the selftest with TEST ALL STARt Return values Result 0 1 RUNning STOPped RST STOPped Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Tasks for Instrument Setup on page 123 Usage Query only TEST KEYBoard STATe State Enables disables the keyboard and the LED test state Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF UNIT Subsystem 11 20 UNIT Subsystem The UNIT subsystem contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated in a command These settings are valid for the entire instrument UNIT ANGLe Angle Sets the default angle unit for remote control Does not influence the manual control parameter units and the display Parameters Angle DEGRee RADian RST RADian Example UNIT ANGL DEG sets DEG as a default unit for all commands which determine angle values
270. struction on how to update the firmware version 1 Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Install SW Options 2 Select Option Key and enter the key code delivered with the new option The new option is now enabled and ready for operation How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 9 7 How to Manually Set a PCle Direct Connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU To build a direct PCle connection between an R amp S SGU and an R amp S SGS which has a Controller gt Revision 5 first you have to manually set the correct PCle interface mode If your R amp S SGS has a Controller gt Revision 5 or higher this settings are done automatically You can check the Controller gt Revision of your instrument in the SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name Hardware Config dialog To manually set a PCle direct connection between an R amp S SGS and an R amp S SGU 1 Connect the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU directly using a PCle cable Refer to chapter 10 3 3 Connecting the Controller and the Instrument on page 116 for cable requirements and setup information Switch on the R amp S SGS and the R amp S SGU Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Maintainance Select Operation gt PCle Interface Mode Select PCIe Interface Mode gt Root Complex o O F ow Restart your instrument for the changes to take place The PCl
271. strument settings can be stored in a file they have to be stored in an inter mediate memory using common command SAV number The specified number is subsequently used in the MMEMory STORe STATe on page 152 command Also subsequently to loading a file with instrument settings with command MMEMor y LOAD STATe on page 151 these settings have to be activated with the common com mand RCL number 11 10 2 Extensions for User Files The following table lists all available file extensions for user files Table 11 2 Automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument Function Contents File suffix R amp S SGMA GUI Save As Open Software settings savrcl User Manual 1176 7726 02 06 145 MMEMory Subsystem 11 10 3 Examples In these examples the current instrument setting is stored in the file test savrcltxtin the directory var user Storing and Loading Current Settings 1 Store the current setting in an intermediate memory with the number 4 This setting can be called using command RCL and the associated number of the memory for example RCL 4 SAV 4 To store the settings in a file in a specific directory specify the complete path MMEM STOR STAT 4 var user test savrcltxt To store the settings in a file in the default drive set the default drive and specify only the file name MMEM CDIR var user SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 test savrcltxt Load the file test
272. struments to the SGMA GUI esssssss 59 How to Manually Add New Instruments to the SGMA GUI see 59 How to Scan for New Instruments 59 How to Activate Instruments for Control from the R amp S SGMA GUI 60 How to Edit Instruments 60 How to Delete an Instrument ss 60 How to Delete all Instruments 61 How to Reserve the Instrument for Control 61 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument 61 Bidirectional Instrument Identification sse 62 6 4 5 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 1 1 7 3 1 2 7 3 1 3 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 5 7 6 7 7 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 12 1 Managing Messages in the Info Dialog 64 Upconverter Settings 65 Frequency Settings eee nente riter ri iu cene VEOSTE siue Ran ER PR an REO Rds 65 Level and Power On Settings eene rien mii rin nna R nnmnnn nna 65 BR ROIS 66 PoWer On EME E 68 I Q Modulation and Signal Impairment ses 69 Te aue lets MITTIT LLL LI qm 69 Gain and Gain Imbalance sise 69 land QOS St M e 70 Quadrature Offset un ten inten eee anced aetna ais 71 General 1 Q Settings is 72 Analog Impairment Settings 73 Pulse Modulation Setting
273. t SGMA GUI main panel Instrument Name Setup Maintenance Oper ation gt Install firmware package 2 Press Select Package and navigate to the directory the new firmware is stored in 3 If several instruments have to be updated to new firmware version enable the fea ture Update All to accelerate the update process All instruments that are in active state and are connected to this controller are updated simultaneously 4 Enter the Security Password 5 Confirm the update with Accept The software transfers the firmware file and automatically starts the update proce dure During the update the message Updating Firmware is displayed in the Info line The update process is indicated by an LED running light Note The update procedure requires a restart of the instrument The restart is per formed automatically The instrument is not accessible during that time 6 Wait until the message Updating Firmware disappears and the update is comple ted The green POWER ON STAND BY LED is on 7 If required install the new R amp S SGMA GUI For detailed description refer to chapter 2 3 1 Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Soft ware on an External PC on page 20 8 If the instrument and the controller PC are connected over the PCIe interface and the external PC does not support hot plugging it is required to restart the external PC How to Activate Options Firmware Update through a Session Control Protoco
274. t DirectoryCount gt integer Number of parent and subdirectories Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Query only MMEMory DELete Filename Removes a file from the specified directory MMEMory Subsystem Setting parameters lt Filename gt string String parameter to specify the name and directory of the file to be removed Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Event SCPI confirmed MEMory HFRee Returns the used and available memory in Kb Return values lt TotalPhysMemKb gt integer Total physical memory lt ApplicMemKb gt integer Application memory lt HeapUsedKb gt integer Used heap memory HeapAvailableKb integer Available heap memory Usage Query only MMEMory LOAD STATe lt SavRclStateNumb gt file name Loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory After the file has been loaded the instrument setting must be activated using an RCL command Setting parameters lt SavRclStateNumb gt Determines to the specific number to be used with the RCL command e g RCL 4 file name String parameter to specify the file name with extension savrcltxt Example See Storing and Loading Current Settings on page 146 Usage Setting only MMEMory MDIRectory Directory Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory If no directory is specified
275. t of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product
276. ter oder hnliche Schutzeinrichtung muss der Versorgungskreis so abgesichert sein dass alle Personen die Zugang zum Produkt haben sowie das Produkt selbst ausreichend vor Sch den gesch tzt sind Jedes Produkt muss durch geeigneten berspannungsschutz vor berspannung z B durch Blitzschlag gesch tzt werden Andernfalls ist das bedienende Personal durch elektrischen Schlag gef hrdet Gegenst nde die nicht daf r vorgesehen sind d rfen nicht in die Offnungen des Geh uses eingebracht werden Dies kann Kurzschl sse im Produkt und oder elektrische Schl ge Feuer oder Verletzungen verursachen Sofern nicht anders spezifiziert sind Produkte nicht gegen das Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten gesch tzt siehe auch Abschnitt Betriebszust nde und Betriebslagen Punkt 1 Daher m ssen die Ger te vor Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten gesch tzt werden Wird dies nicht beachtet besteht Gefahr durch elektrischen Schlag f r den Benutzer oder Besch digung des Produkts was ebenfalls zur Gef hrdung von Personen f hren kann Benutzen Sie das Produkt nicht unter Bedingungen bei denen Kondensation in oder am Produkt stattfinden k nnte oder ggf bereits stattgefunden hat z B wenn das Produkt von kalter in warme Umgebung bewegt wurde Das Eindringen von Wasser erh ht das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages Trennen Sie das Produkt vor der Reinigung komplett von der Energieversorgung z B speisendes Netz oder Batterie Neh
277. tes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 08 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o dafios de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o dafio a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocom
278. the SCPI command CALibration HREQuest b Interpret the response of the query The response is returned in the form of a SCPI command For example a response SOUR POW 6 asks for a power of 6 dBm For a list of all possible responses see CALibration HREQuest on page 138 3 Setthe LO according to the required settings 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the value of step 2b is CALibration HREQ STOP 5 CALibration xxx RESult xxx stands for IOoModulator IQModulator LOCal or LEVel a Query the result of the adjustment request with the SCPI com mand CALibration xxx RESult b The query returns either 0 or 1 signifying pass or fail The instrument is calibrated and can be further used How the described process may take place is shown in table 11 1 If you use a com patible R amp S signal generator the whole process will be completed automatically Table 11 1 Programming example of a calibration process CALibration Subsystem Local Oscillator Controller R amp S SGU Response Interpretation 1 CALibration LEVel R amp S SGU starts the Level Adjustment STARt 2 CALibration HREQuest PROG CREate Level To do create a progress bar with a caption Adjustment Level Adjustment 3 CALibration HREQuest OUTP STATe 1 To do activate the RF output of the LO 4 CALibration HREQuest PROG UPDate 5 The progress of the level adjustment is 5 D
279. the current level Not required for automatic modes Remote command SOURce POWer ALC SONCe on page 160 Power On EMF gt To access the power on EMF settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt Power On EMF This dialog comprises the settings for the power on behavior of the instrument Q Modulation and Signal Impairment Power On State Selects the state which the RF output takes after the instrument is switched on RF Off The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on Previous Setting When the instrument is switched on the output takes the same state as it had when the instrument was switched off Remote command OUTPut STATe PON on page 154 7 3 I Q Modulation and Signal Impairment The R amp S SGU offers I Q modulation with external analog l Q signals I Q modulation with an external analog l Q signal is possible for the instrument equipped with fre quency options R amp S SGU B120V B140V The external signal is input via the IN and Q IN connectors and transferred to the I Q modulator Before the signal is fed into the I Q modulator the signal can be impaired Impairment at this point along the signal flow is offered to allow error correction of the supplied sig nal or set dedicated impairments 7 3 1 1 Q Impairments Signal impairments are well defined arithmetic modifications of the data Every data sample is modified in the same way The purpose of ad
280. the standardi zation of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tuto rial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI 10 1 1 Remote Control Programs and Libraries The figure 10 1 provides a schematic illustration of the remote control capabilities of the instrument Protocol Proprietary VXI 11 HiSLIP USBTMC Library paie Soker VISA controller controller Instrument Driver Application Program Fig 10 1 Remote control interfaces protocols and libraries The following examples give an overview of the dependencies between the available libraries the possible interfaces and protocols and whether an instrument driver is pro vided The involved parts are highlighted e Remote control program using VISA Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Protocol m VXI 11 HiSLIP USBTMC Library VISA Application Program Fig 10 2 Remote control program using VISA Protocol Remote Control Program Socket viOpen TCPIP rssgul00a100010 5025 SOCKET viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n VXI 11 viOpen TCPIP rssgu100a100010 inst0 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n HiSLIP viOpen TCPIP rssgul00a8100010 hislipO INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n USBTMC viOpen USB 0x0aad 0x00ce 1000010
281. the status of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why e Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately An SRQ is always initiated if one or sev eral of bits 2 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer In order to use the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in the enable registers SRE and ESE Remote Control Basics Example Use command OPC to generate an SRQ ESE 1 set bit 0 of ESE Operation Complete SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in th
282. these values and states automatically Generated is an l Q signal with RF 20 GHz and Level 30 dBm 9 2 How to Restore the LAN Connection to an Instrument gt Ifthe LAN connection to an instrument configured to use a static IP address is lost press the LAN LED on the instrument s front panel for more than 3 seconds to reset the LAN settings and to set the Address Mode on page 88 to DHCP How to Switch Between the Operating States Provided the network supports automatic assignment of IP address new IP address will be automatically assigned to the instrument 9 3 How to Switch Between the Operating States The figure 9 2 gives an overview of the operating states of the instruments and how to trigger the switch over between them RESTart Setup gt Restart Setup gt Standby Shut Down Instruments and Exit POWER ON STANDB Booting RESTart POWER ON STANDBY Standby POWER SWITCH OFF POWER SWITCH ON Fig 9 2 Operating states SCPI commands RESTart STANdby R amp S SGMA GUI controls Setup gt Standby Setup gt Restart Shut Down Instru ments and Exit POWER ON STANDBY POWER SWITCH ON OFF Hardkey controls on the front rear panel of the instrument The table 9 1 provides a short description of the operating states and their indication How to Switch Between the Operating States Table 9 1 Indication of the operating states Operating St
283. timmungsgem e Verwendung des Produkts wird angenommen wenn das Produkt nach den Vorgaben der zugeh rigen Produktdokumentation innerhalb seiner Leistungsgrenzen verwendet wird siehe Datenblatt Dokumentation nachfolgende Sicherheitshinweise Die Benutzung des Produkts erfordert Fachkenntnisse und zum Teil englische Sprachkenntnisse Es ist daher zu beachten dass das Produkt ausschlieBlich von Fachkraften oder sorgfaltig eingewiesenen Personen mit entsprechenden F higkeiten bedient werden darf Sollte f r die Verwendung von Rohde amp Schwarz Produkten pers nliche Schutzausr stung erforderlich sein wird in der Produktdokumentation an entsprechender Stelle darauf hingewiesen Bewahren Sie die grundlegenden Sicherheitshinweise und die Produktdokumentation gut auf und geben Sie diese an weitere Benutzer des Produkts weiter Die Einhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise dient dazu Verletzungen oder Sch den durch Gefahren aller Art auszuschlieBen Hierzu ist es erforderlich dass die nachstehenden Sicherheitshinweise vor der Benutzung des Produkts sorgf ltig gelesen und verstanden sowie bei der Benutzung des Produkts beachtet werden Samtliche weitere Sicherheitshinweise wie z B zum Personenschutz die an entsprechender Stelle der Produktdokumentation stehen sind ebenfalls unbedingt zu beachten In den vorliegenden Sicherheitshinweisen sind s mtliche von der Rohde amp Schwarz Firmengruppe vertriebenen Waren unter dem Begriff Produkt zusammengefasst
284. tings Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee These commands are marked as 14 1 2 14 1 3 Remote Control Basics SCPI confirmed in the command reference chapters Commands without this SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules as per mitted by the standard Instrument responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status LAN Interface Messages In the LAN connection the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus Command Long term Effect on the instrument amp ABO Abort Aborts processing of the commands just received amp DCL Device Clear Aborts processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control The instrument automatically returns to remote state when a remote command is sent UNLESS amp NREN was sent before amp GTR Go to Remote Enables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command after amp NREN was sent amp GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously
285. tions e Firmware Hardware e Software Loaded Modules 8 3 Install SW Options Firmware The Firmware section shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform Note Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version available Firmware updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the download site of the instrument s home page This home page always offers the latest information on your instrument e g also on changes of the firmware update procedure Hardware Software WinlQSIM The tables in the sections Hardware and Software list the installed hardware and software options Option Short name of the option Designation Name of the option Licenses Number of licenses Expiration Date For regular options Permanent is indicated in this column Some options are available as trial versions This column shows their expi ration date After this date the option is no longer available on the instrument Loaded Modules Section Loaded Modules is provided for service purposes It lists all loaded software modules with their versions and offers a short description of each module Install SW Options Newly purchased software options are enabled in the Install SW Option dialog They are ready to operate after they are enabled by means of a key code supplied with the option Only if the instrument is
286. tivates the RF output Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Manual operation See RF ON OFF on page 57 OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut STATe PON Mode Selects the state which the RF output takes when the instrument is switched on Parameters Mode OFF UNCHanged OFF When the instrument is switched on the output is deactivated UNCHanged When the instrument is switched on the output remains in the same state as it was before the instrument was switched off RST UNCHanged Example See chapter 11 1 2 Generating an I Q Modulated Signal on page 124 Manual operation See Power On State on page 69 OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer Queries the minimum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Return values lt Lower gt float Default unit dBm Example See chapter 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 126 Usage Query only OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer Queries the maximum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Return values Upper float Default unit dBm Example See chapter 11 1 3 Advanced Task for Optimizing Perform ance on page 126 Usage Query only OUTPut lt hw gt PROTection CLEar Resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped The state of the output is again determined by OUTPut STATe Example OUTP PROT CLE resets
287. to 255 Usage Query only IDN Identification Returns the instrument identification Return values ID Rohde amp Schwarz device type gt lt serial number gt lt firmware ver sion gt Example Rohde amp Schwarz SGU 1407 6004k02 000000 3 1 17 1 03 01 158 Usage Query only IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values lt ISTflag gt 011 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit O in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Common Commands Return values lt Options gt The query returns a list of options The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma separated string zero is returned for options that are not installed Usage Query only PRE lt Value gt Parallel poll register enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Parameters Val
288. tructions in the service manual and the safety instructions when exchanging modules or ordering spare parts The order number for spare parts is inclu ded in the service manual The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting repair exchange of modules including battery exchange adjust ment of the OCXO oscillator and alignment The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde amp Schwarz service centers can be found at the beginning of this manual Cleaning The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth Make sure that the fan openings are not obstructed Shock hazard Before cleaning the instrument make sure that the instrument is switched off and dis connected from all power supplies Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument For example cleaning agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth Storing and Packing Risk of instrument damage due to obstructed fans If the instrument is operated in dusty areas the fans may become obstructed by dust or other particles in the process of time Make sure to check and if nec
289. trument is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ether net LAN local area network The Network Settings dialog provides access to the network settings Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instru ment to the LAN Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address To access this dialog select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Network Settings Network Settings The dialog provides access to the network settings like settings about the general net work environment and specific identification of the computer in the network as well as an indication whether the instrument is connected to the network or not Restart Network Shuts down the network connection of the instrument and subsequently re establishes the connection This function can be used to resolve network problems Note Only the connection of the instrument to the network restarts the network itself is not affected Hostname Displays the individual computer name of the instrument A predefined name is indicated and can be used for network connections see chap ter 6 4 3 Finding Out the Default Hostname of the Instrument on page 61 It is recommend that a connection of the instrument to the network
290. ttacher le produit ou sur des moyens de transport tels que grues chariots et chariots l vateurs etc Vous tes responsable de la fixation s re des produits ou sur des moyens de transport et de levage appropri s Observer les consignes de s curit du fabricant des moyens de transport ou de levage utilis s pour viter des dommages corporels et des d g ts sur le produit L utilisation du produit dans un v hicule se fait sous l unique responsabilit du conducteur qui doit piloter le v hicule de mani re s re et appropri e Le fabricant d cline toute responsabilit en cas d accidents ou de collisions Ne jamais utiliser le produit dans un v hicule en mouvement si cela pouvait d tourner l attention du conducteur S curiser suffisamment le produit dans le v hicule pour emp cher des blessures ou dommages de tout type en cas d accident limination des d chets 1 Au terme de leur dur e de vie les batteries ou accumulateurs qui ne peuvent pas tre limin s avec les d chets m nagers peuvent uniquement tre limin s par des points de collecte appropri s ou par un centre de service apr s vente Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 43 08 Page 7 Consignes de s curit fondamentales 2 Au terme de sa dur e de vie un produit ne peut pas tre limin avec les d chets m nagers normaux mais doit tre collect s par ment Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG a d velopp un concept d limination des d ch
291. tterie ne doit tre retir e de son emballage d origine que lorsqu on l utilise Les cellules ou batteries ne doivent pas tre expos es des chocs m caniques de force non admissible En cas de manque d tanch it d une cellule le liquide ne doit pas entrer en contact avec la peau ou les yeux S il y a contact rincer abondamment l eau l endroit concern et consulter un m decin Il y a danger d explosion en cas de remplacement ou chargement incorrect des cellules ou batteries qui contiennent des lectrolytes alcalins par exemple cellules de lithium Remplacer les cellules ou batteries uniquement par le type Rohde amp Schwarz correspondant voir la liste des pi ces de rechange pour maintenir la s curit du produit I faut recycler les cellules ou batteries et il est interdit de les liminer comme d chets normaux Les accumulateurs ou batteries qui contiennent du plomb du mercure ou du cadmium sont des d chets sp ciaux Observer les r gles nationales d limination et de recyclage Transport 1 Le produit peut avoir un poids lev Il faut donc le d placer ou le transporter avec pr caution et en utilisant le cas ch ant un moyen de levage appropri par exemple chariot l vateur pour viter des dommages au dos ou des blessures Les poign es des produits sont une aide de manipulation exclusivement r serv e au transport du produit par des personnes Il est donc proscrit d utiliser ces poign es pour a
292. ual the instrument itself is case insensitive Numeric suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific channels or sources the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt n lt i gt and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Example Definition HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant N Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 o Different numbering in remote control For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec tion used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified Some standards define a fixed numbering starting with O If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control it is indicated for the corresponding command Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Remote
293. ublic TcpClient TepClient 7 void connectToServer string amp hostname int port void disconnect void transmit string amp txString void receive string amp rxString string getCurrentHostName const int getCurrentPort const private string currentHostName int currentPort int currentSocketDescr SockAddrStruct serverAddress HostInfoStruct currentHostInfo bool clientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize include netdb h include netinet in h include unistd h include TcpClient h TcpClient TcpClient currentHostName currentPort 0 currentSocketDescr 0 ServerAddress currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false receiveBufferSize 1024 TcpClient TcpClient currentHostInfo NULL void TcpClient connectToServer string amp hostname int port Telnet program examples currentHostInfo gethostbyname hostname c str if currentHostInfo NULL currentHostName 1 currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf error connecting host n currentHostName hostname currentPort port currentSocketDescr socket AF INET SOCK STREAM 0 if currentSocketDescr currentHostName um currentPort s s currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf can t create socket n serverAddress sin family currentHostInfo gt h_addrty
294. ue number Default unit V or C Example See chapter 11 1 1 Performing General Tasks for Instrument Setup on page 123 Usage Query only 11 8 Fast Speed Commands This section describes special commands that allow a fast frequency and level setting FFASt lt Freq gt Special command to set the RF output frequency with minimum latency No unit e g Hz allowed Bypasses the status system so command OPC cannot be appended Parameters lt Freq gt float Example FFASt 12750000000 PFAS lt Pow gt Special command to set the RF output level with minimum latency No unit e g dBm allowed Bypasses the status system so command OPC cannot be appended Parameters lt Pow gt float Example PFASt 20 FORMat Subsystem 11 9 FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem contains the commands which determine the format of the data that the R amp S SGU returns to the controller This affects all query commands which return a list of numerical data or block data Reference is made to this in the descriptions of the commands FORMarBORDO erar a 143 O A 143 FORMI S REC TER ee een 144 FORMat BORDer lt Border gt Determines the sequence of bytes within a binary block This only affects blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally Parameters lt Border gt NORMal SWAPped NORMal The instrument expects with setting commands and sends with queries the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floati
295. ue Range 0 to 255 PSC Action Power on status clear Determines whether the contents of the ENAB1e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 011 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RCL Number Recall Loads the instrument settings from an intermediate memory identified by the specified number The instrument settings can be stored to this memory using the command SAV with the associated number It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the MMEMory LOAD number file name extension command RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet Common Commands Usage Setting only SAV lt Number gt Save Stores the current instrument settings under the specified number in an intermediate memory The settings can be recalled using the command RCL with the associated number To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file use the command MMEMor y STORe STATe SRE Contents Service request enable
296. uel Le groupe Rohde amp Schwarz se tient votre disposition pour toutes questions relatives aux pr sentes consignes de s curit Il incombe l utilisateur d employer ce produit de mani re appropri e Le produit est exclusivement destin l utilisation en industrie et en laboratoire et ou si cela a t express ment autoris galement aux travaux ext rieurs il ne peut en aucun cas tre utilis des fins pouvant causer des dommages corporels ou mat riels L exploitation du produit en dehors de son utilisation pr vue ou le non respect des consignes du fabricant se font sous la responsabilit de l utilisateur Le fabricant d cline toute responsabilit en cas d utilisation non conforme du produit Le produit est pr sum faire l objet d une utilisation conforme lorsqu il est utilis conform ment aux consignes de la documentation produit correspondante et dans la limite de ses performances voir fiche technique documentation consignes de s curit ci apr s L utilisation du produit exige des comp tences en la mati re et des connaissances de base de l anglais Par cons quent le produit ne devra tre utilis que par un personnel qualifi ou des personnes form es de mani re approfondie et poss dant les comp tences requises Si pour l utilisation des produits Rohde amp Schwarz l emploi d un quipement personnel de protection s av re n cessaire il en est fait mention dans la documentation produit l emplac
297. umber H is placed in front of the number OCTal The register content is returned as an octal number Q is placed in front of the number RST ASCii Example FORM SREG HEX The register content is returned as a hexadecimal number 11 10 MMEMory Subsystem The MMEMory subsystem Mass Memory contains the commands for managing files and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files The files are stored on the internal flash memory of the instrument or on external USB memory devices The default directory is determined using the command MMEMor y CDIR Use the command SYSTem MMEMor y PATH USER to query the path of the direc tory for user defined data The opt directory is a protected and therefore a not accessible system directory The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed Therefore this directory should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss R amp S SGU100A Remote Control Commands 11 10 1 File Naming Conventions To enable files in different file systems to be used the following file naming conven tions should be observed The file name can be of any length and is case sensitive meaning it is distinguished between uppercase and lowercase letters The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot All letters and numbers are permitted numbers are however not permitt
298. ument can be equip ped optionally with an active electronic step attenuator R amp S SGU B26 Level and Power On Settings Configuring RF Level gt To change the RF level of the selects instrument perform one of the following a Select SGMA GUI main panel gt Level and enter the desired value b Select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt RF Level gt Level and enter the desired value You have to confirm the changes of the RF level in the External Local Oscillator Settings menu for them to be applied to the signal 7 2 1 RF Level gt To access the RF level settings select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Level gt RF Level This dialog comprises settings like the RF level and level limit Mode Allows to optimize the RF output signal for applications where improved harmonic dis tortion or improved wideband noise is required Normal In normal mode the generator provides an RF output signal with high signal to noise ratio as well as low distortion according to the data sheet Low Noise This setting forces the generator to optimize the signal to noise ratio Level and Power On Settings Low Distortion In this mode the generator reduces distortions of the RF signal to a minimum Remote command SOURce POWer LMODe on page 161 Offset Sets a level offset This value represents the level shift of a downstream instrument as for example an attenuator or an amplifier a
299. ument opens CS nue e Field Edit Instrument gt Symbolic Name displays the name of the instrument as shown in the R amp S SGMA GUI main panel Working with R amp S SGMA GUI Dialog Edit Instrument does not appear If this dialog does not open perform the following e Check whether the instrument is correctly connected to the external PC on which you work with the R amp S SGMA GUI e Check if the instrument is configured in the R amp S SGMA GUI and perform if neces sary the steps described in chapter 6 4 2 Handling Instruments in the R amp S SGMA GUI on page 58 e Select SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments check the state of the instrument in the Configure Instruments gt Available Instruments table and activate it if disabled esse Scan LAN instruments with host name prefix How to identify an instrument in an instrument set gt To identify the instrument in an instrument set use one of the device identification functions a select SGMA GUI gt Setup gt Instruments gt Available Instruments gt Instrument gt Edit gt Edit Instrument and trigger Device Identify b select SGMA GUI gt Instrument Name gt Setup gt Remote gt Remote Channels and trigger Device Identify The green LAN LED on the front panel of the instrument blinks Working with R amp S SGMA GUI 6 4 5 Managing Messages in the Info Dialog How to get additional information on the message
300. unicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y sefializar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 A Aparato
301. urce Click on one of the buttons with an instrument name on it to access the menu tree with further settings for the corresponding instrument For a detailed description of the pro vided settings refer to chapter 7 Upconverter Settings on page 65 SGMA GUI c zs File Setup Help as Info T 00 SGS 100004 Freq 10 000 000 000 000 0 J SGU 100014 JE SGT 1 000 000 000 000 GHz Mod pep 20 00 dam Level 20 00 a8m Ret Extension to SGS 100004 GHz y peP 30 00 dBm Level 30 00 dBm Ret ARB None os e a na E rer User 1 Trigger User 2 Marker 2 Main Panel Instrument Connection State The three colors of the state indicator in front of the instrument s name distinguish between the following states grey the instrument is configured and activated in the R amp S SGMA GUI but there is no connection to the instrument green the instrument is active the connection is working and the instrument can be manually and remotely operated e red the instrument is in one of the following states Standby state To operate the instrument manually it has to be switched to ready state see To return the instrument from standby to ready state on page 98 Instrument locked The red state indication together with the message Instrument Locked in the Info line indicates that the instrument is locked for Ex
302. urs et appareils de chauffage soufflants La temp rature ambiante ne doit pas d passer la temp rature maximale sp cifi e dans la documentation produit ou dans la fiche technique Une surchauffe du produit peut provoquer des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entra ner la mort 1171 0000 43 08 Page 3 Consignes de s curit fondamentales S curit lectrique Si les consignes relatives la s curit lectrique ne sont pas ou sont insuffisamment respect es il peut s ensuivre des chocs lectriques des incendies et ou des blessures graves pouvant ventuellement entra ner la mort 1 Avant chaque mise sous tension du produit il faut s assurer que la tension nominale r gl e sur le produit correspond la tension nominale du r seau lectrique S il est n cessaire de modifier le r glage de la tension il faut remplacer le fusible du produit le cas ch ant L utilisation des produits du degr de protection pourvus d un c ble d alimentation mobile et d un connecteur n est autoris e qu avec des prises munies d un contact de protection et d un conducteur de protection raccord Toute d connexion intentionnelle du conducteur de protection dans le c ble ou dans le produit lui m me est interdite Elle entraine un risque de choc lectrique au niveau du produit En cas d utilisation de c bles prolongateurs ou de multiprises ceux ci doivent tre examin s r
303. vent has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENAB1e bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENABle bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user as required Its contents are not affected by reading Sum bit The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register 14 1 5 3 Remote Control Basics The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable
304. vices Installing the R amp S SGMA GUI Software on an External PC The R amp S SGMA GUI is delivered in the latest version available on the CD ROM inclu ded in the instrument s delivery Software updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the download site of the Rohde amp Schwarz home page This home page always offers the latest information on your R amp S SGMA GUI The R amp S SGMA GUI software is provided as separate installation package for the dif ferent operating systems This description focuses on the handling of the Windows 32 version The file naming conventions and the installation instructions for the other operating systems are analo gous The R amp S SGMA GUI installation package for Windows 32 operating system consists of the file SGMA GUI V VV VVV VVV exe The version numbers in the file names vary with each update To install the R amp S SGMA GUI the following hardware and soft ware requirements have to be met Table 2 1 Hardware and Software Requirements Requirement Remark One of the following operating sys R amp S SGMA GUI has to be installed on one of the supported operat tems ing systems e Windows XP SP2 Note e Windows Vista e Windows 7 Any other Windows version or other operating systems are not sup e Windows 8 8 1 ported e Linux Windows Installer Version 4 5 or higher is needed for the installation
305. where Length is the file size in decimal format Parameters for setting and query Filename string String parameter to specify the name of the file MMEMory Subsystem Example MMEMory DATA var user test txt 15hallo Writes the block data to the file test txt The digit 1 indicates a length entry of 1 digit the digit 5 indicate a length of the binary data hallo in bytes MMEMory DATA var user test txt sends the data of the file test txt from the instrument to the controller in the form of a binary block Response 15hallo Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DCATalog path Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory Query parameters path String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the content of the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values Catalog file entry Names of the subdirectories separated by colons The first two strings are related to the parent directory Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 146 Usage Query only MMEMory DCATalog LENGth lt Path gt Returns the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory Query parameters Path String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the contents of the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values l
306. y a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used Example DefinitionSENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value gt lt numeric value The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ 10 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 30 40 14 1 3 3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Allowed parameters are Numeric values e Special numeric values Boolean parameters e Text Character strings Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description Remote Control Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded

R&S SGU100A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S SGU100A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S SGU100A User Manual